Digital PDFs
Documents
Guest
Register
Log In
AA-P346A-TM
May 1983
228 pages
Original
10MB
view
download
OCR Version
9.0MB
view
download
Document:
KS Install 4.1 Feb83
Order Number:
AA-P346A-TM
Revision:
0
Pages:
228
Original Filename:
AA-P346A-TM_KS_Install_4.1_Feb83.pdf
OCR Text
TOPS-20 KS/KL Model A Installation Guide AA-P346A-TM February 1983 This manual describes the procedures for installing TOPS-20, Version 4.1 software on a new DECSYSTEM 2020 or DECSYSTEM-20, Model A and for updating the TOPS—-20 software on an existing DECSYSTEM 2020 or DECSYSTEM-20, Model A. This manual completely supersedes the TOPS-20 Software Installation Guide, manual numbered AA—4195G-TM. Please read it in its entirety. OPERATING SYSTEM: TOPS-20, V4.1 SOFTWARE: RSX—20F, VB14-45G KLINIT, VB12-12 MICROCODE 117 (for 2020) MICROCODE 231 (for 2040/2050) GALAXY, V4.2 Software and manuals should be ordered by title and order number. In the United States, send orders to the nearest distribution center. Outside the United States, orders should be directed to the nearest DIGITAL Field Sales Office or representative. Northeast/Mid—Atlantic Region Central Region Western Region Digital Equipment Corporation Digital Equipment Corporation Digital Equipment Corporation PO Box CS2008 Accessories and Supplies Center Accessories and Supplies Center Nashua, New Hampshire 03061 1050 East Remington Road 632 Caribbean Drive Telephone:(603)884—6660 Schaumburg, lllinois 0195 Telephone:(312)640-5612 Sunnyvale, California 94086 Telephone:(408)734-4915 digital equipment corporatione marlboro. massachusetts First Printing, February 1983 © Digital Equipment Corporation 1983. All Rights Reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies. The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: dlifgliltlali|8 DEC MASSBUS UNIBUS DECmate DECsystem—-10 DECSYSTEM-20 PDPR P/OS Professional VAX VMS VT DECUS Rainbow Work Processor DECwriter RSTS DIBOL RSX The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document requests the user’s critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation. CONTENTS PREFACE = SUMMARY N PREPARING OF CONTENTS ¢ & ¢ ¢ ¢« o ¢ o o« o o INSTALLATION . . . . . ¢« ¢ o o o o 4« o FOR INSTALLATION THE TOPS-20 MONITOR AND THE TOPS ZOAN MONITOR . L] INTRODUCTION L] e el 1 U1 b CHAPTER THE CHAPTER BATCH TOOLS AND . . . SPOOLING . . SYSTEM CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE CHECKING THE TOPS-20 SOFTWARE . ¢« DECSYSTEM=20 . ¢ &« & . . . .« . « « « DECSYSTEM-20 THE . DECSYSTEM-2020 Preparing Loading . . the . and . o o« PACKAGE o o o o FOR o « THE = o . . . . THE STARTING THE MONITOR CREATING SYSTEM the TOPS-20 . FILE . .« ¢ DIRECTORIES FROM TOPS-20 TATILORING THE for . TOPS- 20 RESTORING o« . FOR .« . THE TAPE . BUNDLED . Installatlon Monitor on a . o v e s e SYSTEM e o s s e v ¢« o o o o o o o . . . ¢ ¢ « ¢« o« o« ¢ ¢ + ¢ o o o SOFTWARE FROM e =« + o TAPE . . o o o = .« .« SYSTEM SELECTING A TOPS-20 CHANGING THE SYSTEM CREATING SYSTEM MONITOR NAME . IN . Defining Dial-Up Defining Defining System Logical Names Magnetic Tape Logical Defining Line . o« o . c Llnes . . e e e e e e e s e e e & . . . . . the VFU File . . . . . ¢« « +« « « & Specifying the RAM File . . ¢« ¢« ¢ o « o o o & Local Time Zone . « « « « « o o L] . Specifying Defining the Directcry Account Parameter . .« ¢« ¢« « « o o+ . ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ « & o o o o Improvements . . . « « o« o o o « Validation Performance Parameters . . ad . . . .« . Unit Numbers [N (REMOTE) Printer ¢ 4-1- CONFIG CMD Terminal Speeds +v . . - DEFAULTS . . Setting e o L] o L] O OJdJA UV o PACKAGE . Starting DUMPER .« e o ° HWN w L] . L] L] [ WWwWwWwwwWwwwwwwwwdNh +~ WWWWwWwWwWwWwWwwwwwWwwwWw . SOFTWARE . a . INITIALIZING RUNNING . & SYSTEM DECSYSTEM 2020 DECSYSTEM-2020 CHAPTER . TOPS-20 . .+ Preparing the DECSYSTEM-20 for Installatlon Loading and Starting the TOPS-20 Monitor on CHECKING & 111 Setting . . o = CONTENTS Full 3.3.9.1 Latency Optimization 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 58] . S . e e s s e e e e e e e e e e s e e s e s e . . . « ¢« ¢« ¢« ¢« ¢« ¢« o o o & ¢ ¢ v o o o o o o e e o . Class Scheduling . . e e+ s e e e e e File Archiving and Mlgratlon Parameters Archive Tape Recycle Period . . . « . « Migration Tape Recycle Period . . . . . Tape Drive Allocation . . e e e e e e Enabling Tape Drive Allocatlon e e e e e Treatment of Unrecognized Tapes . . . . e . . . e e .+ s . . . Set . (FOR DECSYSTEM-20 e Bias N = 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 . Scheduler . 3.3.1 3.3.1 3.3.1 . Working [N 3.3.1 WNNDNHHHEHEHEHOOO: ONLY) 3.3.9 (Cont.) Swapplng Controls Controls Accounting . +« Shift Changes 3.5 3.6 CREATING THE LPFORM.INI 4 CREATING THE FRONT-END 4.1 4.2 HALTING THE TOPS-20 MONITOR . . RESTARTING THE FRONT-END MONITOR 4.3 COPYING FILES CHAPTER 5 CREATING THE CHAPTER 6 RESTARTING THE SYSTEM CHAPTER 7 INSTALLING THE TOPS-20 CHAPTER 8 RUNNING THE 8.1 TESTING UNBUNDLED CHAPTER APPENDIX FILE . 3-23 3-24 . . s . GROUP AND USER 3-24 SYSTEM MICROPROCESSOR .+ . « « . « TO RPO4 FILE « & OR RP06 SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION UETP . . . . FLOPPY DISK TOPS-20 UPDATING THE A FROM FILE . 3-17 3-17 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-21 . . . . CHANGING THE OPERATOR'S PASSWORD CREATING PS:<REMARKS> DIRECTORY 3.4 3-16 AND UPDATE TAPES PACKAGE SOFTWARE . . . . . DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 « .« .« . RELEASE 4. RELEASE . MAKING the CNVDSK TO RELEASE . THE Program 4 . . . . . . . . Operator e e e . . e e e . o 4.1 MONITOR THE PRIMARY RELEASE 4 ] MONITOR THE PERMANENT . ¢« o o o MONITOR . UPDATING THE . ¢ o ¢ o o DECSYSTEM-2020 o o TO o o TOPS-20 s o = RELEASE et SOFTWARE INSTALLING THE RELEASE 4.1 . Renaming the Release 4 . 1v SOFTWARE Monitor . . . . . . bt b et et ] doaHOWVWH SOFTWARE Changing System Parameters . Setting a User Group for the MONITOR L] 4.1 PN - i [T T T~ - b L] L] L) Release 4 Monitor . . . . File <NEW-SYSTEM>4-1- CONFIG CMD N = bt b RELEASE the the W Ul W N THE Renaming Creating MAKING THE B W w APPENDIX INSTALLING Running REVERTING > > =i i e B SOFTWARE CONTENTS 2 .3 4 (Cont.) Creating the File PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD Changing System Parameters . . . . . « +« « . . Running CNVDSK . &+ ¢ ¢ &« &« « « o« « « « +« +« « o REVERTING TO RELEASE 4 . . . . . e « « o MAKING THE MONITOR « RELEASE 4.1 MONITOR THE PERMANENT & o o o ¢ & o o o o o o o o s o o o o POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 APPENDIX D FOCKET FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 APPENDIX E TAILORING [] L[] = APPENDIX C APPENDIX F .1 INSTALLATION GUIDE YOUR SYSTEM B-20 FOR ARPANET DEFINING THE HOST NUMBER . . . . . . Entering the Host Number, Name, and Other Pertinent Information . .« « « ¢« « « « + « USING THE B-9 B-10 B-=-14 B-17 STAND-ALONE DISK FORMATTER + « . E-1 « « « E=2 [DECSYSTEM-2020 ONLY] 1 APPENDIX o o « o o o o o« o » « o F 2 3 .4 5 6 LOADING PROCEDURE . . . . PROGRAM-OPERATOR INTERACTION CONFIGURING THE DRIVES . . . PROGRAM DESCRIPTION . . &+ « PROGRAM ERROR MESSAGES . . . ¢« e « &« . o o ¢ & . e e ¢« « + o o ¢ o « s+ o ¢« o ¢« e o +« o« +« o o « o « e« o + o« « + o+ « o« « o o « o« .« o o . o o F FF F F G GENERATING 1 2 3 .4 INTRODUCTION . . . . O RESTORING THE GALAXY FILES e e s e e e RUNNING THE GALGEN PROGRAM . . . . . . ASSEMBLING THE NEW GALAXY SYSTEM . . . 5 6 7 INDEX INTRODUCTION A . . & « o TAILORED + o BATCH AND SPOOLING SHUTTING DOWN THE OLD GALAXY SYSTEM STARTING UP THE NEW GALAXY SYSTEM . MAKING YOUR NEW GALAXY SYSTEM SYSTEM .« o v v v ¢« o o o o o THE o s . . s . . . SYSTEM e . . . e « . e « . & o« G. « G . G- . « G-13 G-16 o« « « G-19 . . . +« PERMANENT o o o o o Index-1 CONTENTS (Cont.) FIGURES FIGURE 2-1 2=2 DECSYSTEM-20 and Front-End Control DECSYSTEM-2020 Control Panel . . .« Panels ¢ v + « e &« e o e o e« « « . « « « « « . « « . . +« . « « « . + . o+ « . « 2-9 2-10 TABLES TABLE 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 6-1 Logical Memory Configurations . . . Terminal Line Numbers DECSYSTEM-20 . Terminal Line Numbers DECSYSTEM-2020 DECSYSTEM-20 Line Printers . . « « &+ DECSYSTEM-2020 Line Printers . . . « System Reload Abbreviations . . . . vl .« . . o « « « . . « « « « ¢« . o« « + 2-12 3-9 3-9 3-12 3-13 . 6-4 « . PREFACE This manual 1. is for is the person who responsible for: DECSYSTEM-20 or Updating the TOPS-20 software on an existing DECSYSTEM-20 or Installing the TOPS-20 software on a new DECSYSTEM-2020 2. DECSYSTEM-2020. Started To use this manual effectively, you should first read Getting then become familiar with the information in the and With TOPS-20, the with familiar be also should You TOPS-20 Operator's Guide. are avallable as stand-alone manuals These Guide. User's TOPS-20 documents and are also included in the TOPS-20 Notebook Set. You do not have to know assembly language programming or have previous software system, although both are TOPS-20 a installing experience helpful. How to Use This Manual 1including instructions, step-by-step contain 8 Chapters 1 through install Release 4.1 to how describing recovery procedures, error DECSYSTEM-2020. and/or DECSYSTEM-20 new a on software TOPS-20 and B show how to install Release 4.1 TOPS-20 software A (Appendixes on a DECSYSTEM-20 or DECSYSTEM-2020 that is running a previous version of TOPS-20.) Even though most of the installation procedures within this manual pertain to both systems, there are certain steps and error pertain only to the DECSYSTEM-2020. that procedures recovery procedures are shaded in gray, as in Chapters 2, 5, and 6. These To install the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-20 or DECSYSTEM-2020, 8, doing exactly as through 1 Chapters in directions the follow instructed. If you are experienced 1in 1installing the TOPS-20 software, vyou may follow the example in Appendix C or D, depending on the type of system you are installing. To update the DECSYSTEM-2020, TOPS-20 software on carefully perform the both the DECSYSTEM-20 and instructions in eilther Appendix TOPS-20 the A or Appendix B, depending on whether you are installing software on a DECSYSTEM-20 or DECSYSTEM-2020. The commands you must do to If you type accurately, all you have type are printed in RED. perform the indicated function and verify that the terminal output is memory 1n Remember that systems differ resembles the sample output. describe configuring memory, that steps so peripherals, and size initializing line printers and disk packs, and assigning logical unit numbers to tape drives, require you to type the values that are correct system for your and not the vii sample parameters. first sample output, the If your terminal output does not resemble the word "Error" or "ERROR", then after instructions ALL the read choose the recovery procedure that corrects your problem. NOTE The version and edit numbers 1n this the numbers from differ could manual The terminal. printed on your console printed on your console must be numbers than the numbers 1n Time estimates are included so that you know about how equal this takes. to or greater manual. long a step Times are estimated to the nearest minute, so don't worry if a step takes somewhat longer or shorter than this. If a step pertains only to a certain type of system, it is noted as if a step pertains only to the DECSYSTEM-20, For example, such. If the step it says, (For DECSYSTEM-20 Only). heading step the beside pertains only to a DECSYSTEM-2020, it is shaded 1in gray. In This Manual Symbols Used (i) Indicates where you type a control backslash. by This is holding down the CTRL key while typing a backslash. backslash key is located near the key labeled LINEFEED 1labeled ESC, done The or LF. (Cs) (Crer) Indicates where you PREFIX, ALT, or press the key ESCAPE, ALTMODE. Indicates where you press the RETURN key. DECSYSTEM-20 have The error recovery procedures that pertain to the DECSYSTEM-2020 have The error recovery procedures that pertain to the word error printed as Error. the the word error printed as ERROR and are shaded. NOTE If you see: Error: ERROR: together for an error recovery 1t means thls error recovery procedure, procedure is the same for both systems. v1ill Reference Documentation this of wusers for The following manuals are valuable as references These manuals are shown. also are numbers order Their manual. included in the TOPS-20 Software Notebook Set. Order No. Manual Title TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual AA-5115B-TM TOPS-20 EDIT Reference Manuel AA-5415A-TM TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference Manual AA-4166D-TM TOPS-20 Operator's Guide AA-4176D-TM TOPS-20 OPR Command Language Reference Manual AA-H600A-TM TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide AA-4169F-TM TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide AA-D850A-TM TOPS-20 User's Guide AA-4179C-TM 1x CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Installing the TOPS-20 DECSYSTEM-2020 1is software not a outlined in the following procedures to follow. It the software. 1.1 SUMMARY Chapter 2 OF hard describes and Chapter 3 powering obtaining from describes magnetic how to Chapter 4 describes how DECSYSTEM-20 and copy Chapter the 5 of this describes the DECSYSTEM-20 follow the or procedures to the the installation is proper monitor, declare the system defaults for terminals, system improvements, scheduler controls, and front-end file from the floppy installation build After DECSYSTEM-20 or front-end tape. to create the files into it how the DECSYSTEM-20 DECSYSTEM-2020 preboot monitor from also describes loading the TOPS-20 select chapter, DECSYSTEM-2020. chapter, the you up either either the system name, and change the devices, accounting, performance file archiving and migration. completion if chapters. This chapter explains some of the also describes the tools you need to install monitor from floppy disk or the magnetic tape. This chapter software either CONTENTS DECSYSTEM-2020, bundled on task the you is for Upon the your complete. microprocessor have system disk. completed file the system steps for in this complete. Chapter 6 describes how to boot either Chapter 7 describes how to install the system from TOPS-20 disk. distribution and update tapes. Chapter 8 program). Appendix describes how This program A contains chapters within TOPS-20 software the step-by-step User Environment cursory check of instructions and the manual, describing how system to a Release 4.1 TOPS-20 Test Package the system. pointers to to update software a (UETP various Release 4 system on DECSYSTEM-20. Appendix chapters TOPS-20 the to run the performs a B contains within software step-by-step the system DECSYSTEM-2020. manual, to a instructions describing Release 4.1 and how TOPS-20 pointers to update software to a various Release system 4 on INTRODUCTION experienced the for guide 1installation pocket a is C Appendix It contains the text and output from a sample installation installer. appendix This A. Model of the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-20, The steps are keyed to the have error recovery procedures. not does steps within the body of this manual that describe how to install the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-20. Appendix D is a pocket installation guide for installing the TOPS-20 does not have error appendix This DECSYSTEM-2020. a on software The steps are keyed to the steps within the body recovery procedures. this manual that describe how to install the TOPS-20 software on a of DECSYSTEM-2020. Appendix E contains the steps for tailoring your system for the ARPA network. stand-alone the Appendix F contains instructions for running KSFORM, disk formatting program (used with the DECSYSTEM-2020 only). generating Appendix G contains the steps for (GALAXY) system tailored for your particular a site. and batch spooling to how on The TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide contains helpful hints manage the TOPS-20 and the TOPS-20 DECSYSTEM-2020 timesharing systems. timesharing making before manual A system manager should read this generally available to users. NOTE The TOPS20.BWR file is contained in the system saveset on the installation tape. the 1in changes describes file This software this 1.2 PREPARING FOR made too late for inclusion in manual. INSTALLATION A DIGITAL Field Service Representative will install your or your DECSYSTEM-2020 diagnostics correctly. hardware and Before he DECSYSTEM-20 inform you when the system runs leaves, obtain the following information: 1. information You need this The serial number of the machine. if you are installing the software on a DECSYSTEM-2020. It will be used in Chapter 5. Serial Number INTRODUCTION The channel, unit, and controller number of each disk drive, and whether it is dual-ported. The controller number for RP04 and RP06 disks is -1. (The DECSYSTEM-2020 does not support dual-ported disk drives.) The unit number is located on the display panel on the drive. The DECSYSTEM-20 dual-ported disk drives are connected to both the CPU and the front-end processor. It is an error if two dual-ported drives with the same unit number are connected to the front-end processor. The procedures in this manual assume that the wunit on which you a&re installing the front-end software 1s Unit 0. Type 3. The need UBA Channel number this software on Disk Drives Unit # Controller which the disk drives information if you are a to # DECSYSTEM-2020. UBA # # Dual-Ported are ? attached. installing the You TOPS-20 INTRODUCTION 4. A list of line numbers and line speeds. Use these numbers in Section 3.3.1 when you set the default terminal speeds. Also, find out which lines are remote so that you can define the remote lines as described in Section 3.3.2. Lines Auto Line # Speed Auto Remote? Line # Speed Remote? NOTE The word Auto over the word Speed declares that the line 1is specified as an autobaud line in Section 3.3.2. Autobaud detection pertains only to the DECSYSTEM-20. The serial number of each magnetic tape drive. Use these numbers in Section 3.3.4 to define magnetic tape logical unit numbers. The number appearing on the thumbwheel does not necessarily correspond to the 1logical wunit number of the drive. Magnetic Serial # Type Serial Tapes # Type Serial # Type INTRODUCTION NOTE The serial numbers on TU70 and/or TU71 tape drives are made up of three factors. These factors consist of the RH20 channel number, the DX20 number, and a two-digit tape unit number. Assuming that the RH20 channel number is 2, the serial number for tape unit 3 would be as follows: 2003 In the above example, the RH20 channel is the first digit (2), the DX20 number is the second digit (0), and the last two digits are the tape unit number (03). The serial number for a TU72 tape drive can be found on the back of the tape drive. 6. The unit number and type of information in Section 3.3.5 Line each 1line printer. Use this to initialize the line printer. Printers Programmable Unit 7. The base # Model address information 1if of # the vyou Lowercase RH11 are disk ? VFUO controller. installing the ? You TOPS-20 need software this on a DECSYSTEM-2020. RHEASE 1.3 You INSTALLATION need the # TOOLS following tools to install the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-20: 1. The RSX-20F Disk-Boot System, System Floppy A. The files on this floppy are wused to boot the central processor from an RP04 or RP0O6 disk pack. These files are 1listed below, together with their (C) of whether they floppy disk, and creation F11ACP.TSK;1 TKTN.TSK; 1 MOU.TSK; 1 KLA.MCB; 231 BOOT.EXB;1 MTBOOT.EXB; 1 BF16N1.Al11;1 PARSER.CMD; 1 TOTAL sizes (in 256-word blocks), are written on a contiguous OF dates: 77 6. 5. 36. 36. 36. 1 10. 207. C C C BLOCKS 1-5 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 14-MAY-82 IN 8. 05:50 05:50 05:51 05:59 06:01 06:01 05:51 05:51 FILES an indication area of the INTRODUCTION The RSX-20F Auxiliary Diskette, System Floppy B. The files on this floppy are used to boot for various functions in installing and maintaining the software on a DECSYSTEM-20. Floppy B contains the PARSER.TSK;1 KLDISC.TSK;1 KLRING.TSK;1 LOGXFR.TSK;1 MIDNIT.TSK;1 SETSPD.TSK;1 KLI.TSK;1 T20ACP.TSK;1 BOO.TSK;1 COP.TSK;1 DMO.TSK;1 INI.TSK;1 PIP.TSK;1 RED.TSK;1 SAV.TSK;1 UFD.TSK;1 ZAP.TSK;1 RSX20F.SYS; 1445 TOTAL OF following 71. 5. 6. 10. 4. 5. 72. 8. 19. 8. 5. 23. 56. 6. 23. 9. 38. 58. 426. C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C BLOCKS files: 19-NOV-82 14:19 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:06 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 18-MAY-82 12:07 19-NOV-82 14:19 IN 18. FILES The RSX-20F Auxiliary Diskette, System RSX20F.MAP;1 contains only one file; Floppy C. This floppy The TOPS-20 1Installation tape vi4.l and the TOPS-20 Distribution tape. The Installation tape you use depends on the type of system you are installing. The following is a systems and the tapes you should use to install the of list TOPS-20 ¢ A) If you are installing the TOPS-20 software on a (MODEL DECSYSTEM-20 number 2040 or 2050, vyou should be using Installation the contains software package QT010, which ORDER 16MT9, INSTL KL-A V4.1 TOPS-20 labeled tape NO. AP-4171H-BM, and the Distribution tape labeled TOPS-20 v4.1 e software. KL-A DIST 16MT9, ORDER NO. AP-4172H-BM. If you are installing the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, vyou should be using software package QT022, which contains the 1Installation tape labeled TOPS-20 V4.1 2020 INSTL 16MT9, ORDER NO. BB-D867E-BM, and the Distribution tape 1labeled TOPS-20 V4.1 2020 DIST 16MT9, ORDER NO. BB-D868E-BM. The TOPS-20 software for the DECSYSTEM-2020 is completely on magnetic tape; there are no floppy disks or floppy disk drives for the DECSYSTEM~2020. e If you are installing TOPS-20 DECnet-20 V2.1 software on a DECSYSTEM-20, you should be using software package QTDO1l. This package includes the DECnet-20 Distribution tape labeled NO. ¢ TOPS-20 DECnet-20 DIST.MT va2.1, ORDER BB-H240C-BM. If you are installing TOPS-20 DECnet-20 V2.1 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, vyou should be using software package QTD20. This package includes the DECnet-20 Distribution tape, labeled TOPS-20 DECnet-20 DIST.MT V2.1, ORDER NO. BB-H241C-BM. INTRODUCTION The TOPS-20 Installation tape V4.1 for all DECSYSTEM-20s contains the TOPS-20 monitor and related programs. The files on this tape are: The TOPS-20 monitor (SAVE The TOPS-20 command processor The DLUSER program DLUSER The data DUMPER (SAVE (ASCII file) program (SAVE Three DUMPER savesets format for the format) (SAVE format) format) recorded following format) at 1600 bpi in DUMPER directories: PS:<SYSTEM> PS:<SUBSYS> PS:<UETP.LIB> The TOPS-20 Distribution tape for the TOFS-20 bundled software. sets recorded at 1600 bpi the savesets all DECSYSTEM-20s contains There are five DUMPER save in DUMPER format. The contents of are: Saveset 1 contains documents about the software directory Saveset 2 contains files for the (same as the files on the Installation tape) PS:<SYSTEM> directory PS:<SUBSYS> Saveset (same as 3 contains files the files on the for the Installation tape) build to needed Savesets 4 and 5 contain source files and PS:<SYSTEM> directories the in software the TOPS-20 the and monitor the PS:<SUBSYS>, except for command processor DECSYSTEM-2020 the for V4.1 The TOPS-20 Installation tape The files contains the TOPS-20 monitor and related programs. on this tape KS10 The are: microcode bootstrap routines The TOPS-20 monitor The TOPS-20 (SAVE command processor The DLUSER program (SAVE DLUSER data (ASCII file) program (SAVE The DUMPER format) (SAVE format) format) format) INTRODUCTION Three DUMPER savesets recorded format. These savesets at 1600 contain bpi the in DUMPER following directories: PS:<SYSTEM> PS:<SUBSYS> PS:<UETP.LIB> The microprocessor The TOPS-20 the TOPS-20 recorded at saveset file system initialization program Distribution tape for the DECSYSTEM-2020 contains bundled software. There are five DUMPER savesets 1600 bpi in DUMPER format. The contents of each are: Saveset 1 contains documents about the software Saveset 2 contains (same as the files files for the directory on the Installation tape) PS:<SYSTEM> Saveset 3 contains (same as the files files for the directory on the Installation tape) PS:<SUBSYS> Savesets 4 and 5 contain the files needed to build the software in the directories PS:<SYSTEM> and PS:<SUBSYS>, except for the monitor and the TOPS-20 command processor A separate tape for each unbundled product you have purchacsed. NOTE The term "bundled software" refers to the contents of the 1Installation and Distribution tapes considered together, or to the contents of the Distribution tape alone. The term "unbundled software" refers to the optional software, which can be purchased separately. Formatted disk packs. If you must format disk packs on a DECSYSTEM-20, ask your DIGITAL Field Service Representative to format the disk packs. If you have a DECSYSTEM-2020, you should 1instead use KSFORM, a stand—-alone disk formatting program, to format your packs. KSFORM is 1included on a separate for using tape in the 2020 software packages. KSFORM are found in Appendix F of this Instructions manual. INTRODUCTION 1.4 THE TOPS-20 MONITOR AND THE TOPS-20AN MONITOR Four monitors are DECSYSTEM-20 Model distributed A 2040 and with 2050. the TOPS-20 software for the the TOPS-20 software for the They are: MONSML. EXE MONMED. EXE MONBCH. EXE MONBIG. EXE Two monitors are DECSYSTEM-2020. distributed They with are: 2020-MONSML, EXE 2020-MONMED. EXE 2020~-ARPA-MONSML. EXE EXE 2020-ARPA-MONMED. The 3. Chapter in described All the monitors mentioned above are installation will proceed more smoothly if you take time to decide now which 1.5 monitor THE BATCH you want to use. AND SPOOLING SYSTEM Your TOPS-20 software system initialization includes a standard GALAXY If you need a special batch and spooling spooling system. and batch system, first install the standard system, then refer to Appendix G of how to build your own specialized on instructions for manual this GALAXY system. CHAPTER CREATING THE 2 TOPS~-20 FILE SYSTEM This chapter describes how to create a new TOPS-20 file system for both the DECSYSTEM-20 and the DECSYSTEM-2020. If you are installing the software on a DECSYSTEM-20, perform Steps 1 through 19 and Steps 36 through 69 in this chapter. TIf you are installing the software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, perform Steps 20 through 69. STOF: These Procedures Install A New System Fcllow the procedures in this chapter if ycu are 1installing Release 4.1 TOPS-20 scftware on a new system, or if you are creating a new file system disk packs. Use Appendix depending on the type of have, to update from Release 4.1 TOPS-20 existing system. 2.1 The be CHECKING TOPS-20 sure 1. that THE TOPS-20 software you Disk-boot System Floppy the Auxiliary Floppy RSX-20F System as the contains the FOR THE to an DECSYSTEM-20 following items. Check to them. of this text, this floppy is referred to text, this floppy is referred to text, the floppy referred to this tape A. Diskette B rest Floppy Auxiliary Floppy System TOPS-20 the System Throughout 4, rest System the PACKAGE 4 on System Floppy RSX20F as of Release software A the System Throughout 3. all RSX20F as 2. package have Throughout SOFTWARE on a set of A or B, system you of this B. Diskette C. rest Floppy of this is C. Installation Tape Throughout the rest of the Installation tape. V4.1 this text, is referred to as CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM TOPS-20 Distribution Tape V4.1 5. Throughout the rest of this text, this tape is referred to as the Distribution tape. product software unbundled each for tape separate A Chapter 7 lists the unbundled software products, purchased. install to describes the format of the tapes, and tells how 6. them. Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.3 for the contents of these floppy disks and magnetic tapes. Preparing the DECSYSTEM-20 for Installation 2.1.1 Prepare the system for installation by powering it up and mounting the disk packs. I}Ewep 1: l}E&ep 2: Read all the instructions in this manual with your before Ask Your DIGITAL Field Service Representative Packs are proceeding installation. if the Disk Formatted. packs are Ask your DIGITAL Field Service Representative if the disk If they are not, ask him to for use with the DECSYSTEM-20. formatted (If you have a DECSYSTEM-2020, you may format the disk format them. The packs must be See Appendix F for details.) packs yourself. RP04 or RP0O6 either use may You further. formatted before you proceed packs. .Step 3: Power Up the System. the Turn on the power by pressing the POWER switch if the light under (Do not touch the 1is off. word POWER on the operator's panel emergency power switch unless you see smoke or sparks coming from the The system is ready after a few seconds, and the power light system.) comes on. Be sure that the system is completely powered on: the disk drives. 1. Check 2. the press 1If power is off, Check the magnetic tape drives. i.e., the white switch containing the ON/OFF switch, rocker If you have trouble with the disk light, on the front panel. your DIGITAL Field «call tape drives, or magnetic drives Service Representative 3. assistance. or LP20A an for 1If power is off Check the line printers. LP20B printer (which has four buttons on the right of the top The panel), reset the knee-level breaker on the lower panel. TIf you have an LP20F or disregard it. TAPE light may be on; of LP20H printer (which has four rocker switches on the left cover just above the lights and the 1lift top panel), the reset the breaker. 4. for Be sure that the printer has paper. Turn on the console terminal. has paper. Be sure that it is on line and CREATING mpStep 4: This Label manual contains the by the of FILE SYSTEM the procedures for creating This structure is called PS: system. All packs that will structure them TOPS--20 the Disk Packs. for your system. needed to run the include THE must be RP20 disks. consecutive of the same type. Decide how many packs "logical unit numbers," the public structure and contains the files make up vyour public The public structure will have, and you starting with 0. cannot assign These are logical pack numbers referred to in Step 40. Identify each pack writing these numbers with a felt-tip pen on the upper surface of pack. Also label the pack cover with a gummed label. The format the label may TOPS-20 be: Disk Structure Logical Pack ID: "pg" Unit: n CAUTION Do not of use a gummed the pack off and label itself, cause on because severe the surface it can spin damage to the drive. BpStep 5: Mount are the disk similar RP06 one Mount the Disk Packs. written pack packs in on on front end. front end may dismount Be careful damaged if the the the the disk the when 1. another press 3. and RP06 surface of the pack. Make sure unit 0, dual ported, and is by disk distinguished packs so that the drives is a disk jammed disk a is pack off because center the can the into name packs RP04 vyou or place connected to files wused is complete, by you be and cleaned already mounted on button and wait bar drive door (RM03 the Turn the and cover on the slide pack lift turn the counterclockwise out Be can Follow be these and cover the drive and spinning, until the drive stops. drive down counterclockwise Gently resistance, Lift the pack bottom cover. the handle freely. shaft drive. pack: START/STOP back, drive the the Press turns 4. RP04 be mounting door any drives. can that mounting pack instructions 2. upper drive proper but However, during system operation, the pack that contains files must be on dual-ported drive 0 as it was during when 1If the The installation procedure stores the on this pack. After the installation the maintained. the front-end installation. on appearance 1ift the pack handle a only), over the few turns vertically. a few push the pack. until If more there it is turns again. of the drive and place it on the protective sure that the cover clicks closed. CREATING 5. Pick up the pack bottom cover by THE TOPS-20 to be FILE mounted squeezing SYSTEM and the handle remove of the the bottom protective cover. CAUTION If you insert a pack without the bottom cover, you will be use or remove the removing unable to pack. Gently lower the pack vertically 1into the careful not to hit the sides of the drive. centered in the drive while lowering it. 6. drive, being Keep the pack Turn the handle clockwise about two full turns. You will feel a resistance roughly equal to the power steering on a car. When the resistance increases noticeably, stop turning or damage off will the result. 7. Lift 8. Close 9. Start the drive by pressing the cover door to vertically. the drive. the START/STOP button. The is ready to be used when the READY light comes on. RP06 the DOOR LOCKED light ensures that the disk 1is disk (On an mounted properly.) 10. Be sure that labeled WRITE the drive is not write PROTECT must be off. protected. The switch CAUTION Do not leave a disk pack or magnetic tape on top of a disk drive. The vibration from the drive can cause these items to fall to the floor, causing expensive and irreparable damage. BpStep 6: Check the CONTROLLER SELECT Switches. 1is 0 drive Be sure that the CONTROLLER SELECT switch on dual-ported set to A/B and that every other drive has the CONTROLLER SELECT switch to switch To change the CONTROLLER SELECT switch, set the set to A. the desired position and press the STOP button to cycle the drive When the drive has stopped spinning, press the START button and down. wait for the READY light to come on. NOTE Be sure that all drives that are part of PS: are off line and are spinning. not not CREATING the floppy disk System in the FILE SYSTEM Floppy labeled: A left floppy drive floppy TOPS-20 Mount System Floppy A in Drive 0. I'Step 7: Place THE disk with (drive 0). your thumb on the To mount a label. floppy disk, Then with your hold the thumb and the label facing upward, slide the floppy disk into the floppy drive Press down the bar until it contacts the back of the drive and stops. until it clicks. CAUTION Make sure that the paper directory that is sometimes included with the floppy disk is not sticking to the back of the floppy damage disk. Failure to the floppy disk and do so will the floppy drive. I}Step 8: Mount System Floppy B in Drive 1. In the right floppy drive Floppy System (drive 1), place the floppy disk labeled: B HINT Be sure that you have mounted the floppy disks in the correct drives, or problems will develop in Step 12. »Step 9: Mount the Installation Tape on MTAO:. Remove the write ring TOPS-20 (if present) Installation from the magnetic tape labeled: Tape the on unit 1lowest the Drive 0 is and mount the tape on drive 0. lowest channel on the lowest TM03, TM02 controller or DX20 controller. Your DIGITAL Field Service Representative gives you this information. which drive is drive 0, make sure that all determine cannot you If drives are off line except the one to you want use. NOTE Be sure to mount the Installation tape. Refer to Section 1.3 tape for for your the correct system. correct Chapter 1, Installation CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM for a CAUTION The logical unit number magnetic tape drive 1is not determined by numbered thumbwheel on the left side TU45 drives. The numbered the of thumbwheel is the slave number of the drive. Never change the setting of this thumbwheel. To mount a reel of tape on 1. Place the reel on tape facing you. 2. Lock the reel of the hub. 3. Thread by the on tape following easier 4. Wind 5. Press the the the LOAD reel hub hub by Make To mount 1. a sure LINE reel Place of 2. 3. ON LINE to on a the reel of tape tape the facing reel TU77 On be the the of FILE the on the the center tape heads shields take-up slowly back for lit; if reel. advances beginning beginning is the on the hub order, the RESET Press, in counterclockwise the PROTECT PROTECT tape. the head the of it is onto of the the tape. the tape, it not, press the drive: top hub with the 1labeled side by pressing the rocker in the center hub. completion, the on, indicating FILE of in of you. wound Press the side rocker front logical the tape a threaded automatically right-hand corner of the the logical beginning of 4, the onto tape the button tape the labeled button. of the Lock of the in Move The moves the drive overshoots repositions itself. ON slot clockwise button. the slot. If 6. with pressing the tape turn and drive: arrows. the one tape top through to tape take-up TU45 the access the a ON LINE light is is LOAD buttons. turns. Then the through the slot drive, and the tape tape. The tape 1is tape leader is near the upper is positioned at button. LOAD, ON that the light and few LINE, and FILE PROTECT (FPT) lights should tape is positioned at the beginning. When on, not the on, system remove cannot the write write on ring the tape. If from the back CREATING THE TOPS-20 To mount a reel of tape on a TU70, TU71, 1. Place the reel of tape on the side of the tape facing you. 2. Thread the tape approximately 3. 2.1.2 1leader three FILE or TU72 tape drive: rightmost hub with down inches SYSTEM in the slot front of the the 1labeled until it is read/write head. Press, in order, the RESET, LOAD, and START buttons. The tape leader is threaded automatically on the take-up reel and the tape is positioned at the logical beginning of tape. Loading and Starting the TOPS-20 Monitor on a DECSYSTEM-20 To create the TOPS-20 file system, load the TOPS-20 monitor into the system and start the file system initialization routine. Steps 10 through 19 load and start the TOPS-20 monitor, by performing the following operations: 1. Load the front-end monitor from the floppy disks. Use front end to initialize the central processor and memory. 2. Use the central 3. (MTBOOT) to program load from the TOPS-20 System Tape magnetic tape into the load the TOPS-20 monitor from memory. Use MTBCOT to start the TOPS-20 monitor initialization routine. I’Step 10: Magnetic Floppy A processor. Use MTBCOT to into 4. front-end monitor Bootstrap the at the file system Place the Front-End HALT Switch in the ENABLE Position. Open the second door from under the DECSYSTEM-20 the left control side of panel, the DECSYSTEM-20, to access the directly front-end switches. Be sure that the front-end HALT switch is in the ENABLE position (Figure 2-1). If the switch is in the HALT position, move it up to the ENABLE position. When the HALT switch is in the HALT position, the front BWpsStep 11: end will not operate. Set the Switch Register to 000007 (octal). The front-end control panel has 16 switch register switches (Figure 2-1). Set them to 000007 (octal) by setting (up) switches 2, 1, and 0, and leaving the rest down. (Refer to Part 4, Chapter 1 of the TOPS-20 Operator's Guide for a detailed description of all switches.) Booting the front end from a floppy disk with the switch register set to 000007 causes the front-end monitor to run the central processor initialization dialog. This loads the central processor microcode and confiqgures central processor memory. CREATING THE BpStep 12: TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Hold ENABLE and Press the SWITCH REGISTER Button. Hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button on the control panel loads the front-end monitor and starts the (Figure 2-1); this The system prints: initialization dialog. RSX-20F VB14-45G 6:11 23-0CT-79 [SY0O: REDIRECTED TO DXO0:] [DX0: MOUNTED] [DX1: MOUNTED] KLI —-- VERSION VB12-12 RUNNING KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> Item Identifies RSX-20F VB14-45G 6:11 23-0CT-79 The name of the front-end monitor. The version of the front-end monitor. The time and date that the front-end was The area from which the front end obtains its files. If SY0: 1is redirected to DX0:, the front end obtains the files from floppy drive 0. If SY0: 1is redirected to DBO:, the front end obtains the files from disk drive O. The name and version of the central processor initialization dialog. The prompt for the central processor initialization dialog. SYO: KLI KLI> Error: monitor built. If the system does not print the above heading, be sure that the floppy disks are mounted in the proper drives and the HALT switch is in the ENABLE position. Then retry Step 12. NOTE The version and edit numbers in this could differ from the numbers printed on your console. The numbers printed on your console must be equal to or greater than the numbers in this manual manual. CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM —— LOAD SWITCHES ——— ENABLE DISK SW REG FLOPPY FAULT LIGHT POWER LIGHT POWER SWITCH EMERGENCY POWER OFF 9452.2 ENABLE/HALT SWITCH REGISTER Figure 2-1 SWITCH DECSYSTEM-20 and Front-End Control Panels CREATING THE TOPS-20 Figure 2-2 FILE SYSTEM DECSYSTEM-2020 Control Panel CREATING I’Step 13: To to the the central RETURN processor key. this question, hardware. First Model A a list TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Type YES and Press the RETURN Key. enter press THE initialization Following you comes will the this, see serial a if dialog, you answer description number (S/N) and power line freguency (either 50 of hardware options present on your of type either of the vyour CPU, or 60 Hertz). system. If an -- ENTER DIALOG and or YES system's followed Then item present it will not be listed. The example below shows all options. Following this, the system prints KLI -- RELOAD [YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]?: KLI YES NO by comes is not available MICROCODE [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>YES (xer) KLl -- KL10 S/N: KL1 -- KL10 HARDWARE INTERNAL 2102., 60 HERTZ ENVIRONMENT: CHANNELS CACHE KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]? KLI> Error: If the system does not the floppy disks return to Step 12. MpStep 14: print are the above mounted in heading, the proper sure that drives, be then Type YES and Press the RETURN Key. To load the central processor microcode, type key. After 30 seconds, during which the microcode is loaded and the system prints KLI YES LOADED [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? are the followed by KLI -- installing the TOPS-20 TOPS-20 software on VERSION 231 LOADED RECONFIGURE CACHE and press the RETURN floppy drives click, the -- MICROCODE VERSION 231 followed by KLI--CONFIGURE KL {FILE,ALL,REVERSE, FORCE,YES,NO]? KLI -- RELOAD MICROCODE [YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]? KLI>YES (®e1) KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION 231 LOADED mpsStep 15: STOP. Go to Step KLI -- 16 if the system RECONFIGURE prints: CACHE [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? KLI> Go to Step KLI KLI> -- 17 if the CONFIGURE system KL if you software on a 2050. If you are installing a 2040, the system prints KLI--MICROCODE prints: MEMORY [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]? MEMORY CREATING THE WpStep 16: TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Type ALL and Press the RETURN Key. To reconfigure the central processor cache, type ALL and press the RETURN key. Upon receiving this reply, the system configures all avallable cache. After the configuration 1s complete, the system prints: KLI>ALL KLI -- KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY ALL CACHES ENABLED [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]? KLI> Error: If the system does not print one of the headings above, be sure that the floppy disks are mounted in the proper drives, then I'Step 17: return to Step 12. Type ALL and Press the RETURN Key. To configure the central processor memory, type ALL and press the RETURN key. This answer configures all available memory in the most useful manner and then prints a message indicating the results. These results will be different, depending on the type of hardware you have. Refer to Table 2-1, below, for the sample output that pertains to your system. (Refer to the TOPS-20 Operator's Guide for detalls on memory configuration.) After the configuration 1s complete, prints KLI -- LOAD KL BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO,FILENAME]?: KLI -- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY the system [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO]? KLI>ALL (rer) Table Logical Depending one of the size of your 2-1 Configurations system, your output MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT 00000000 00000000 128k 128K 00 03 01 02 00 03 O1 02 MA20 MA20 4 4 BpStep 18: the resemble CONFIGURATION. CONTROLLER If the system does not print a heading similar to one of those above, be sure that the correct floppy disks are mounted in the proper drives, then return to Step 12. Type MTBOOT and Press the RETURN Key. prompt KLI>, KLI -- LOAD KLI -- WRITE KL KLI>MTBOOT (rer) KLI> will following: LOGICAL Error: After on the Memory type MTBOOT BOOTSTRAP and press the [YES,NO,FILENAME]? CONFIGURATION FILE [YES,NO]? RETURN key: CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM KL.CFG, file front-end the The system asks whether it should write your current configuration and the means you used to describes which this If bring up the system (disk, floppy disks, or magnetic tape). and means same the use to attempt will end front the written, 1is file system. the reload or the same configuration when you next install FILE CONFIGURATION WRITE question, the to answer default The to Therefore it is recommended that you answer NO [YES,NO]?, is YES. front-end a have you when Later, present. the for question this the 6), configuration that should be recorded (Step 148, in Chapter configuration file will Type NO and Press the RETURN Key. mpStep 19: type NO and press the RETURN key. the prompt KLI>, After for you. be written -- WRITE CONFIGURATION FILE KLI KLI>NO(w) KLT -- BOOTSTRAP [YES,NO]? LOADED AND STARTED MTBOOT> The front end loads the central processor memory program from the floppy When bootstrap program. seconds), the system prints MTBOOT>. Error: If the with Dbootstrap the mounted on drive 1, and then starts the 45 (about at bootstrap command 1level Continue at Step 36. system prints: KLI> -- ?BOOTSTRAP LOAD FAILED floppy wrong the or any other error message, you may have or you may not have stopped the 0 in drive mounted disk 1is (The backslash key «(\) Type CTRL/\. central processor. After 10 seconds, the system prints near the LINEFEED key.) The Type the command ABORT and press the RETURN key. PAR>. which means the central processor has PAR%, prints system Go stopped. back to Step 12. If the system prints the following message exactly: --- KLI KLI ?BOOT FILE NOT FOUND ?BOOTSTRAP LOAD FAILED -- ENTER DIALOG KLI [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> mistyped you You either have the wrong floppies mounted or If the Go back to Step 13. Dbootstrap. the of name the error floppy recurs, make sure that you disks. Software 2.2 If the error have mounted continues, proper Support. CHECKING THE TOPS-20 SOFTWARE PACKAGE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 The TOPS-20 software package contains the following items. be the contact Digital sure you have them: e TOPS-20 Installation Tape e TOPS-20 Distribution Tape Check to CREATING 2.2.1 Preparing mpStep 21: packs TOPS-20 the DECSYSTEM-2020 Prepare the system for the disk THE and FILE for SYSTEM Installation installation by powering Installation it tap up, and mounting Power Up the System. Turn on the power by pressing the POWER button (Figqure 2-2). (The power is off if the light under the word POWER is off.) The system is ready Be after sure that a few the seconds, system the is the POWER light comes completely powered on. on: 1. Check 2. Check the magnetic tape drives. If power is off, press the i.e., the white switch containing the ON/OFF switch, rocker light, on the front of the tape drive. 1If you have trouble with the disk drives or the magnetic tape drives, call your DIGITAL 3. disk and Field drives. Service Representative Check the line printer. (which has four for assistance. If power is off for a LP20A or LP20B buttons on the right of the top panel), reset 1light tape The the knee-level breaker on the lower panel. If power is off for an LP20C or disregard it. on; be may switch. power the reset and LP20D, open the front panels 1is located on the right side as you face switch POWER (The the printer.) Press the RESET button, ON-LINE then press the button. 4, Be Turn on the CTY. I}Step 22: sure it line and has paper. Type a CTRL/C on the CTY. Type a CTRL/C on the console terminal. print is on the KS10> prompt. Go to the next The step. system may or mey not ~C KS10> .Step 23: Type a CTRL/\ on the CTY. To stop the system from trying to load the microcode from disk, type a The system may or may not print ENABLED before it on the CTY. CTRL/\ (The commands that you type continue at Step prints the KS10> prompt. 29.) ENABLED KS10> CREATING THE mpstep 24: TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Ask Your DIGITAL Field Serv1ce Representat1ve"if the Packs are Formatted._n_Jy_ P ‘ ' R R e e se T Disk N A P R e Ask your DIGITAL F1eld Serv1ce Rep‘ese_tative’lf the dlsk packs are to the formatted format for use with the DECSYSTEM-2020. them. Or If they are not, ask him you ‘can’ format “theém ourself, using stand-alone 2020 disk formatting program ava11a le on a separate tape in your software package. The procedures for ‘running the disk formatting program are descrlbed 1n Appendlx F of this manual .Step 25: Label the Disk Packs. This manual contains the procedures for cre tlng the publ1c‘ structure for your system. This structure is called Pps: "and‘contains the files needed to run the system. It can consist of one or ‘two RP04 or RPO6 the pack disk packs, or one to four RMO3 disk packs.“'The dlsk packs that make up your public structure must be of the same type. Tdentify each pack by writing the logical unit number of the pack ‘with a felt-tip pen on the upper surface of the pack, and on an external label ~on PR TOPS-20 DISK PACK ‘_ Structure Name: Logical Unit: n "PS:" CAUTION Do not use a gummed label on\the surface of the off pack itself because it can spin and cause drive. I’Step 26: severe damage 'to the o Mount the DlSk Packs. Mount the disk packs on the drlves.f The procedures' “in this manual assume that a disk pack is on drive 0. After the installation is complete, you may dismount the disk pack so that 'the drive can be cleaned and malntalned ' L 35 i ' Be careful when mountlng a dlsk pack, becausewthe drlve shaft ~can damaged if the pack is jammed off center into the drlve._ instructions when mounting a pack - To mount a pack on an 'RPO4 or RP06 dJskdrlve; perform ‘the' steps: 1. following o If another disk pack is already mounted 6n' the spinning, press be Follow these drive and ‘the rocker switch labeled START/STOP to the STOP position and wait until the disk pack stops spinning. Push the door back and sllde the pack cover down over the pack. 2. Turn the cover counterclockw1se a few turns _until it turns freely. Gently 1ift the pack vertlcally.“ If there is any resistance, and 3. Lift 1lift turn the handle a few more turns counterclockwise again. the pack bottom cover. out of the drlve and place 1t on the protective Be sure that the cover cllcks closed. CREATING 4. Pick up bottom the pack cover by THE to TOPS-20 be FILE mounted squeezing SYSTEM and the handle remove of the the protective bottom cover. CAUTION If you insert a pack without the bottom cover, you will be use or remove the pack. Gently lower the pack wvertically removing unable to into the careful centered not to hit the sides of the drive. in the drive while lowering it. Turn the handle the pack clockwise cover off. about If two there is full any drive, Keep turns. Try Lift the cover off on Close the door Start the drive sure that the that of increases drive. pressing the the START position. The disk READY and the DOOR LOCKED lights Be turn vertically. the by 1lifting resistance, handle clockwise until you feel a resistance 1like power steering on a car. When the resistance noticeably, stop turning or damage will result. being the pack the drive is not START/STOP is ready come on. write rocker to be switch used when to the protected. NOTE Do To mount a disk not leave a disk pack or magnetic tape on vibration items to top of a disk drive. The from the drive can cause these fall to the floor, causing expensive damage. pack on an RM03 disk drive, perform the following steps: 1. If another disk spinning, press pack stops Press the pack is already mounted the START/STOP button and on the drive wait until the and disk spinning. bar on the drive door and lift the door up. Slide the pack cover down over the pack and turn the handle counterclockwise a few turns until it turns freely. Gently lift the pack vertically. 1If there is any resistance, turn the handle a few more turns counterclockwise and 1lift again. Lift the pack out of the drive. Pick up the bottom cover fit it onto the bottom of the pack. Turn the knob on bottom cover clockwise until it tightens. and the CREATING 5. THE Pick up the pack that _protectlve bottom TOPS-20 you cover FILE want by SYSTEM to mount and remove turning the knob on the the bottom ‘cover counterclockwise until there is no resistance. Gently lower the pack vertically into the drive, being careful not to hit the sides of the drive. Keep the pack centered in the drive whiie lowering it. 6. Turn the handle clockwise about two full turns. Try 1lifting the pack cover off. If there is any resistance, continue turning the handle clockwise until you feel a resistance like that of power steering on a car. When the resistance increases noticeably, stop turning or damage will 7. Liftlthé cover'bff Vertically. 8. Clbse_the door on the drive. 9. Start the drive by pressing the START/STOP button. 10. Be'sure:that the drive is not write protected. - is mpStep 27: ready to be used when the READY light result. The comes on. disk Check the CONTROLLER SELECT Switches. Be sure that the CONTROLLER SELECT switch on drive 0 is set to A/B and that every other drive has the CONTROLLER SELECT switch set to A. To change the CONTROLLER SELECT switch on an RP06 disk drive, do the following: 1., Set the sw1tch to the desired p051t10n. (The CONTROLLER SELECT SWLtCh is 1ocated on the dlsk dlsplay unit.) 2. Cycle down the dr1ve by pushxng the START/STOP rocker switch to the STOP position. When the drive has completely cycled down, press the rocker switch to the START position. 3. Wa1t for the READY and DOOR LOCKED lights to come on. To change the CONTROLLER SELECT sw1tch on an RMO3 dlsk drlve, follow1ng- 1. Open the Eront panel CONTROLLER SELECT drlve, just of switch below knee the_'disk'_dfive' and (on level). the right do the locate the hand side of the 2. 'Set the CDNTROLLER SELECT sw1tch to the desired position. 3. Cycle_down the drlve by pre551ng the START/STOP button. 4, Walt for the READY light to come on. the drive_.is,'completely button agaln to start it. cycled down, ' press When the START/STOP CREATING .Step 28: THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Mount the Installation Tape on MTAO:. Remove the write ring (if present) from the magnetic tape 1labeled TOPS-20 Installation tape and mount the tape on drive 0. Your DIGITAL Field Service Representative will tell you which drive is drive 0. If you cannot determine which drive is drive 0, make sure that all drives are off line except the one you want to use. NOTE The logical unit number for a magnetic tape drive 1is not determined by the of numbered thumbwheel on the left side Never change the setting of drive. the this To mount a reel of thumbwheel. tape on a TU45: Place the reel on the top hub with the labeled 1. tape facing Lock the reel on the hub by pressing the rocker 2. the of 3. side of the you. in the center hub. Thread the tape through the slot in front of the heads by following the arrows. Move the head shields back for easier access to the the tape tape one slot. 4, Wind 5. Press the LOAD button. The tape slowly advances onto the take-up reel and moves to the logical beginning of the tape. If the drive overshoots the beginning of the tape, it repositions 6. Press To mount 1. a 2. Place the tape on a TU77 if it is not tape drive: facing 1labeled side you. the reel on the hub by pressing the already on. reel of tape on the top hub with the tape reel. the rocker in the center hub. Press, in order, the RESET and LOAD buttons. The tape 1is wound counterclockwise a few turns. Then the tape leader is threaded automatically through the slot near the upper right-hand corner of the drive, and the tape is positioned at the 4, the Lock of 3. of take-up itself. the ON LINE button reel of turn clockwise onto the logical Press the beginning ON LINE of tape. button. On completion, the LOAD, ON LINE, and FPT (FILE PROTECT) lights should be on, indicating that the tape is positioned at the beginning. When the FILE PROTECT light is on, the system cannot write on the tape. If the FILE PROTECT light is not on, remove the write ring from the back of the tape. CREATING To mount 1. a reel Place tape 2. of tape the reel of label facing Thread the 2.2.2 To a TOPS-20 TU70, tape you. tape approximately 3. on THE TU71, on the 1leader three FILE or TU72 tape drive: right-hand-side down inches SYSTEM in the front hub slot of the with the it is until read/write head. Press, in order, the RESET, LOAD, and START buttons. tape leader is threaded automatically on the take-up reel the tape is positioned at the logical beginning of tape. Loading create the and Starting TOPS-20 from the TOPS-20 36 load and start operations: file the TOPS-20 system, Monitor load the on a TOPS-20 DECSYSTEM-2020 resident Installation tape into the system. Steps the TOPS-20 monitor, by performing the 1. Load the microcode Installation tape. 2. Load the secondary the resident and bootstrap bootstrap routine routine from The and the monitor 29 through following from the Installation tape. 3. Load TOPS-20 monitor from the Installation tape. NOTE If you are using tape drive skip Steps 29 through 34, Step I’Step 29: To inform system, question 0, and you may start at 35. Type MS and Press the RETURN Key. the system you type MS >>UBA?. and are selecting press the magnetic RETURN tape key. The to bootstrap system prints the the KS10>MS (xer) >>UBA? ERROR: If you mistype the command, the system responds with the error message ?IL (meaning illegal command) and the KS10> prompt. Try giving the command again. If the error persists, »Step 30: contact your DIGITAL Field Service Representative. Type 3 and Press the RETURN 'Key. To inform the tape 1is on, system which Unibus Adapter type 3 (3 is the default) and system the prints >>UBA? question the press TOPS-20 1Installation the RETURN key. The >>RHBASE? 3 >>RHBASE? ERROR: If the number CTRL/C system you and prints typed return the in to message was Step not 29. 2-19 a ?BN, it legal octal means that number. the Type a CREATING THE l’Step 31: TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Type 772440 and Press the RETURN Key. To inform the system of the RH11l base address, type 772440 (772440 is the default) and press the RETURN key. The system prints the question >>TCU? >>RHBASE? 772440 >>TCU? ERROR: If the number CTRL/C I’Step 32: system prints the message you typed in was not a and return to Step 29. ?BN, legal it means that the octal number. Type a Type 0 (zero) and Press the RETURN Key. To inform the system which tape control wunit using, type 0 (0 is the default) and press the prints the question >>DENS? on the RH11 you are RETURN key. The system >>TCU?0 (rer) >>DENS? ERROR: I’Ehep 33: If the number CTRL/C system prints the message vyou typed was not a and return to Step 29. 7?BN, legal it means that the octal number. Type a Type 1600 and Press the RETURN Key. To inform the system of the density of the default) and press the RETURN key. the tape, type 1600 (1600 is The system prints the guestion >>SLV?. >>DENS? 1600 (G >>SLV? ERROR: I}Step 34: If the number CTRL/C and Type 0 (zero) To inform the the default) system prints the message vyou typed was not a return to Step ?BN, legal it means that the octal number. Type 2 29. and Press the RETURN Key. system what slave tape unit and press the RETURN key. you The are using, type 0 system prints the (0 1is prompt KS10>. >>SLV?0 KS10> ERROR: If the number system prints the vyou typed was CTRL/C and return to Step message not a 29. ?BN, 1legal it means that the octal number. Type a CREATING W) Step 35: THE FILE SYSTEM Type MT and Press the RETURN Key. To have the microprocessor immediately from the TOPS-20 RETURN TOPS-20 key. The system initiate Installation prints KS10>USR the tape, MOD and bootstrap type MT and the prompt procedure press the MTBOOT>. KS10>MT(Rer) KS10>USR MOD MTBOOT> NOTE The remaining pertain to both »Step 36: steps in systems. this chapter Type /L and Press the RETURN Key. To load the TOPS-20 monitor from magnetic tape into memory, type /L and press the RETURN key. The system rewinds the tape on drive 0, loads the resident monitor, skips a 1line, and prints the MTBOOT> prompt: MTBOOT> /L(rer ) CHN:2 DX20:0 MICROCODE VERSION 1(0) LOADED, VERIFIED, AND STARTED MTBOOT> NOTE The message microcode installing concerning 1is the printed TOPS-20 DECSYSTEM-20 with the DX20 only if you are software on a a DX20 tape controller. Error: ERROR: If you have made a typing error and the system prints the MTBOOT> prompt correct If you press the again. return Reissue key, the command. did not put the magnetic tape and the on 1line, the system prints: ?NO RDY DRIVE MTBOOT> Place If the the tape system on line prints ?BAD FIL FMT, ?BAD EXE DIR the give /L command again. message: or Make sure that you have mounted the correct TOPS-20 Installation tape on drive 0 and that all other tape drives are off line. Then rewind the tape and try giving the /L command Support. again. If the error recurs, call DIGITAL Software CREATING Error: If the system probably THE TOPS-20 does mistyped not the FILE SYSTEM print name the MTBOOT> MTBOOT. The prompt, system you prints the message: KLI -- ?BOOT FILE NOT KLI -- ?BOOT LOAD FAILED KLI -- ENTER DIALOG FOUND [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> If the floppy disks MTBOOT properly, contact DIGITAL The system see 1f press the line. ON Try mounted back Software will you are go use have LINE typing the to 12. and If the on line. drive on vyou error typed recurs, Support. magtape that more than one button to take /L properly Step is tape each Check line. unwanted to 1If drive so, off again. NOTE The following procedure use during installation are trying has to bring already TOPS-20 disk Chapter 6 been Step it) Operator's I’Efiep 37: To and the for you on to 151 set Step 148 of in (for the the Note the for that a and to Guide 1If monitor manual or procedure. a refer this DECSYSTEM-2020, preceding up intended only. installed packs, of is TOPS-20 the correct ) Type /G143 and Press the RETURN Key. start the press TOPS-20 the File-system RETURN File-system key. Initialization The Initialization system routine, starts the type TOPS-20 /G143 monitor routine: at MTBOOT> /G143 [FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TYPE "?" TO ANY OF THE QUESTIONS. ] DO YOU WANT Error: If ERROR: prompt, If TO you the REPLACE make system for a If the system Step EXE probably 12 does SYSTEM and correct not back the THE system PUBLIC STRUCTURE? reprints the the Step 12 MTBOOT> for a prompt, check DECSYSTEM-20, vyour Step DIR typed a or prints: again. for MTBOOT> command. print to ON DECSYSTEM-2020. ?BAD you FILE error the Go 35 command an reissue typescript. THE FOLLOWING the If wrong you DECSYSTEM-20, command. still or get Step 35 Try giving the an error, go for a /G143 back to DECSYSTEM-2020. CREATING 2.3 INITIALIZING THE THE TOPS-20 TOPS-20 FILE FILE SYSTEM SYSTEM To initialize the TOPS-20 file system, you must public structure and the number and location of part of the public structure. The steps in this section New home blocks the file system). The directory all the 1initialize the define the name of the each disk pack that is TOPS-20 file system by beginning of pointers to creating: 1. 2. 3. (which contain pointers <ROOT-DIRECTORY> directories in the (which to the contains system). The directories <SYSTEM>, <SUBSYS>, <NEW-SYSTEM>, <NEW-SUBSYS>, <UETP>, <UETP.LIB>, <KUETP.RUN>, <ACCOUNTS>, <OPERATOR>, 4., Space 5. The for and the system movement, by <SPOOL>. front-end swapping file system. space (the the monitor, of pages area allocated between memory and for the disk). NOTE Refer Guide the mWpStep 38: To to the TOPS-20 for a detailed System Manager's explanation of all above. Type YES and Press the RETURN Key. create the public [FOR ADDITIONAL structure, type YES INFORMATION TYPE "?" and press TO ANY OF THE the RETURN key. FOLLOWING QUESTIONS.] DO YOU WANT TO REPLACE THE FILE SYSTEM ON THE PUBLIC STRUCTURE? DO YOU WANT TO M)Step 39: To write YES and DEFINE THE PUBLIC STRUCTURE? Type YES and Press the RETURN Key. the home press the blocks for RETURN key. each unit in the public DO YOU WANT TO DEFINE THE PUBLIC STRUCTURE? HOW YES(xr) MANY PACKS ARE IN THIS STRUCTURE: structure, YESCrer) type CREATING I’Step 40: THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM Type the Number of Packs and Press the RETURN Key. Count the number of disk packs vyou plan to have 1in your public The following the answer and press the RETURN key. Type structure. example 1: uses ON WHICH "CHANNEL,UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK If you type the wrong number of Error: After press that Step the # 0 disk MOUNTED: type packs, CTRL/\. the system prints PAR> (10 seconds), type ABORT and the RETURN key. The system prints PAR% (indicating to back Go stopped). has processor <central the 12 and start again. If you type the wrong number of ERROR: 1(ker) STRUCTURE: IN THIS HOW MANY PACKS ARE system Go KS10>. prints disk back type packs, CTRL/\; to Step 35 and start again. ) Step 41: Type ? (Do Not Press the RETURN Key). 1is that You must inform the system of the location of each disk pack channel, the of sure not are you If system. file public the in Dbe to causes This ?2. controller and unit numbers of each disk pack, type the system to print the channel and unit number of each disk drive: ON WHICH "CHANNEL,UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK # 0 MOUNTED: ? [ENTER A PAIR OF NUMBERS SEPARATED BY A COMMA THAT SPECIFY THE CHANNEL, CONTROLLER, AND UNIT UPON WHICH THE APPROPRIATE PACK IS MOUNTED. THE FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF VALID CHANNEL, CONTROLLER, UNIT 1,-1,0 NUMBERS: 1,-1,1 ;TYPE=RP06,DUAL PORT ;TYPE=RP(06,0FFLINE,DUAL PORT 1,-1,2 ;TYPE=RP04,0FFLINE,DUAL PORT ) ON WHICH "CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK NOTE The "CHANNEL" DECSYSTEM-2020 following is DECSYSTEM-2020 is an number always example for 0. of the The the output. 0,0 ;TYPE=RPOG6 0,1 ;TYPE=RP06,0FFLINE ] NOTE The all controller number TOPS-20 systems CANNOT be used in the is always -1 on because RP20 disks public structure. # 0 MOUNTED: CREATING Error: THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM If you fonllowed the procedure in Step 6 exactly, drive 0 will be 1listed as dual-ported. Of the remaining drives, those that contain the packs that are to be your public structure will be listed as on line. All other drives will be listed as off line. If a drive that you want to use is not controller select switch is probably procedure in Step 6 for changing it to the system prints seconds, 10 After press the RETURN key to halt to Step 12 and start again. the listed, the drive's set to B. Follow the Then type CTRL/\. A. Type ABORT and PAR>. central processor. If a drive you want to use is listed as off line, for the READY light to come on. wait and line Step ERROR: Return turn it on Go back to 12. If you folquéd the proégdufé in Step 26, drive 0 will be that are not to be part of All drives line. as on listed will be listed as off line. “your public structure ' drive's the If a drive that you want to use is not listed, Follow the is probably set to B. switch select controller you've After it to A. procedure in Step 27 for changing the to switch select controller the changed The system prints the KS10> position, type CTRL/\. Return to Step 35 and start again. correct prompt. If a drive you want to use is listed as off line, turn it on and - line Step I’Ehep 42: the RETURN 35 and wait start for the READY light to come on. Go back to again. Type the Channel No., Controller No., Unit No., Press and Key. Type the channel number, the controller number, and unit number of the You must answer this the RETURN key. dual-port drive and press your ask If there is any problem, question once for each disk pack. DIGITAL Field Service representative to give you the channel and unit The controller number of all drives except the number of each drive. is RP20 Since the RP20 cannot be used -1. number the controller should always be -1. ON WHICH "CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT" ll—llo DEFAULT SWAPPING DO YOU WANT THE Error: ERROR: current SPACE? step. If your answer CTRL/\. ABORT and After is valid but is not the one you wanted, press processor. ERROR: IS LOGICAL PACK $# 0 MOUNTED: several If your answer is invalid, the system prints one of repeat simply can You messages and repeats the question. the Error: in the public structure, Go 10 back seconds, RETURN the the system prints PAR>. key to Step 12 and to start halt the central again. 1f your answer is valid butEié'ndt"fihe one you wanted, CTRL/\. Step 35 The and system prints start again. 2-25 type Type the prompt KS10>. type Go back to CREATING THE ) Step 43: Type ? TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM (Do Not Press the RETURN Key). To determine the default size of the swapping space for your system, type 2. The system prints the default swapping space for either the 2020, 2040, or 2050. The default swapping space for the 2020, 2040, or 2050 is 5035 pages. If you are planning on using a monitor other than MONSML for the 2020, 2040, 2050, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.1 for the correct swapping space for DO the YOU [THE DO WANT THE DEFAULT IS YOU B Step 44: monitor WANT you choose. DEFAULT 5035 THE SWAPPING PAGES] DEFAULT (for SWAPPING SPACE? a 2020, 2040, or 2050) size, type SPACE? Type YES or NO and Press the RETURN Key. If you want to accept the default swapping the RETURN key, and proceed to Step 46. DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT SWAPPING DO YOU DEFAULT SIZE WANT THE space YES, press SPACE? :F5i v FRONT END FILE SYSTEM? If you want to specify the size of the swapping space, type NO and press the RETURN key. The formula for determining the proper swapping space for your system is found in the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide, Chapter After Step 5. you determine the size of swapping space you need, proceed to type CTRL/\. After Type ABORT and press 10 the 45. DO YOU HOW Error: ERROR: l"Step 45: WANT MANY THE PAGES DEFAULT FOR If you type seconds, the SPACE? SWAPPING? the wrong answer, system prints PAR>. RETURN key to Step and start 12 SWAPPING halt the <central processor. Return to again. If you type the wrong answer, type CTRL/\. prints the prompt KS10>. Return to Step 35 and The start system again. Type the Decimal Number of Pages and Press the RETURN Key. Type the decimal number of disk pages you want to assign for swapping and press the RETURN key. This option is provided so you can increase the amount of swapping space in the future. The default size 1is the maximum amount that vyour present monitor will use for swapping. If you decide to increase the amount used by the monitor in the future, you must already have assigned that much space on the disk during the installation procedure. Otherwise, you must repeat the installation procedure and specify the larger number. The system will round the number of pages specified up to an integral number of cylinders on the disk. HOW DO MANY YOU PAGES WANT THE FOR SWAPPING? . DEFAULT SIZE FRONT END FILE SYSTEM? CREATING Error: If you typre ? INVALID and returns that After press to »Step 46: To If an THE TOPS-20 FILE invalid number, the NUMBER to the Step 12 Type ? YOU [THE DO and question in PAGES Step prnts: FOR 44. THIS TYPE OF DISK you type an answer If start WANT THE IS WANT again. (Do Not Press the RETURN Key). DEFAULT YOU SWAPPING system is wvalid but 1is not the one you wanted, type CTRL/\. 10 seconds, the system prints PAR>. Type ABORT and the RETURN key to halt the central processor. Go back determine the default you already kncw what DO OF SYSTEM THE gize of the the default DEFAULT 950 SIZE front-end file system, type is, you may omit this step. FRONT END FILE SYSTEM? FRONT END FILE SYSTEM? 2. °? PAGES] DEFAULT SIZE NOTE If you are installing the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020 and are using RM03 disk packs for vyour public structure, do not reserve any space for the front-end file system. However, if you are installing the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020 and are using RPO6 disk packs that may later be used as the public structure on a DECSYSTEM-20, you must reserve space for the front-end file system in this step. l}Step 47: Type Type YES and Press the RETURN Key. YES, press the RETURN key, and proceed to Step 48. DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT SIZE FRONT END FILE SYSTEM? YESCre) DO YOU mpStep 48: WANT THE Type ? DEFAULT SIZE type pages allocated DO YOU [THE DO a question mark. for WANT THE DEFAULT IS YOU WANT AREA? (Do Not Press the RETURN Key). To find out how many pages are space, BOOTSTRAP THE the assigned as the boot file space. DEFAULT SIZE BOOTSTRAP AREA? BOOTSTRAP AREA? 64 PAGES] DEFAULT default The system responds with SIZE ? boot file the number of CREATING ) Step 49: It and Type YES the Press TOPS-20 the RETURN FILE SYSTEM Key. that you take the default bootstrap space. is recommended press and THE RETURN DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT SIZE BOOTSTRAP AREA? [STRUCTURE »Step 50: "PS" SUCCESSFULLY [PS MOUNTED] $$NO SETSPD the system prints ?PS YES DEFINED] UNIT 0 HAS a NO the structure you message BAT DO YOU WANT TO WRITE Type (&ru YES STOP. The system now recognizes If Type YES key. and press the similar just defined and prints to: BLOCKS A SET OF RETURN key. PROTOTYPE BAT Continue with BLOCKS? the next step. 23NO SETSPD means that the system cannot run the SETSPD program. This you have not yet loaded the SETSPD program into because expected is the file system. This message may be printed at any time before the system reguests Error: ERROR: the date and time. If certain error conditions occur while the monitor is for protected, write 1is drive mounting the structure (a example), the system prints an error message followed by: ?HAVE THE PROBLEMS MENTIONED ABOVE BEEN CORRECTED YET: When the problem has been corrected, type Y and press the RETURN key. Go back to Step 12 for a DECSYSTEM-20 or Step 35 2.4 for STARTING Now that the performing THE a DECSYSTEM-2020. MONITOR file system is the following initialized, steps. you can start the system by CREATING I}Step 51: The ENTER the restarting, CURRENT date the and RETURN For entered time as AND in key. responds TIME: the Type example, following by the two 31-JULY-1977 system format: 2 time o'clock in PM AM/PM on the last format day or of 24-hour July may AND TIME: 2-MAR-80 retyping HAVE ENTERED SUNDAY, IS THIS CORRECT (Y,N) the date 1630(rer) and 2-MARCH-1980 time. 4:30PM, Type Y and Press the RETURN Key if the Date is Correct. If the date and time are correct, type Y and press the RETURN key. the date and time are incorrect, type N and press the RETURN key. system again for the date and HAVE ENTERED SUNDAY, IS THIS CORRECT (Y,N) Y& time: 2-MARCH-1980 4:30PM, Type INSTALLATION and Press the RETURN Key. INSTALLATION and press the RETURN key. Whatever following this «question 1is entered 1into the PS:<SYSTEM>ERROR.5YS. The TOPS-20 monitor starts system prints VALIDATION WHY IS <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN DISABLED and RUNNING you type FOUND - ACCOUNT RELOAD? INSTALLATIONCxer) RUNNING The NOT text system error file, running, and the DDMP. <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT NO If The RELOAD? BpStep 53: Type asks YOU WHY be PM: YOU I’ffiep 52: and Press the RETURN Key. hhmm ENTER CURRENT DATE The SYSTEM wait... DATE day-month-year format. FILE prints System Press TOPS-20 Type the Date and Time, system Type THE FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED DDMP SYSJOB system prints the message <SYSTEM> ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED because the ACTGEN program has not been run. (Refer to Chapter 6 of the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide for more information.) The system prints NO SYSJOB because the SYSJOB program is not stored on disk. This program is not needed yet, so ignore Error: this If message. you type incorrect an incorrect entry; string, continue with do the not next worry step. about the CREATING .Step 54: THE TOPS-20 SYSTEM Type CTRL/C to Tell the System That You Want to Start a Job. <SYSTEM>ACCOUNT.TABLE.BIN RUNNING NO FILE NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED type any DDMP SYSJOB (Cc1RL/C) | NO EXEC MX> .Step 55: The Type G Then MTAO: system is now at the and Press the RETURN Key. miniexec command level, and miniexec command. Use this command 1language to command processor from tape. Type CTRL/U if you want while The at miniexec system command prints NO (containing the TOPS-20 language not needed To skip over prints skips is ET over prompt the end FILE. the EXEC at of because this the Type end can load the to erase TOPS-20 a 1line level. command of you point, monitor MTAO: the the language) save and monitor so ignore file, press save file does the file and PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE not exist. this type RETURN The command message. G. The key. prints system The the system miniexec MX>. NO EXEC MX>GET FILE MTAOQ: MX> NOTE If you are using tape drive 0, following steps procedures, Error: If ERROR: you get an INTERRUPT e.g., error AT tape drive other than MTAl:, message in MTA2:. the form: location where location is an ignored, so continue ’Step 56: a reply accordingly in the and/or error recovery octal number, this with the next step. message may be Again Type G, Then MTAO:, and Press the RETURN Key. To load the TOPS-20 command processor from magnetic tape into memory, type G. The system prints ET FILE. Type MTAQO: and press the RETURN key. The system reads the program from MTAQ: into memory and prints the miniexec MX>GET prompt FILE when it is finished: MTAO: MX> 2-30 CREATING Error: ERROR: call DIGITAL If you system »Step 57: start FILE system Software make a prints typing the form be INTERRUPT AT location, specifying the wrong more the for @ DECSYSTEM-20 errors continue, Support. mistake MX> and press the Try again. prompt. RETURN key, the Type S and Press the RETURN Key. TOPS-20 type S. The prints the name and prompt, @: the the may SYSTEM Start at Step 10 once a DFECSYSTEM-2020. If the memory, and TOPS-20 If you get another error in the tape could be bad or you tape drive. or Step 35 for To THE TOPS-20 command processor system prints version that you TART. Press the TOPS-20 of Jjust the loaded RETURN 1into key. commend The processor MX>START Crir) TOPS-20 Command processor 5.1(1354) @ Error: If ERROR: command the If system in you continue, you the or Rewind get the Step 35 contact receive error the tape error 1, vyou did the command error, go back a Software message and only in to If G step. 12 for a the errors 601772, follow Support. INTERRUPT listed give one this Step DECSYSTEM-2020. procedures manually AT Repeat for DIGITAL recovery the INTERRUPT miniexec. still DECSYSTEM-20 If prints the AT below. the following commands: MX>GET FILE MTAQ:(rer) MX>» RESET (krer) MX>GET FILE MTAO: (ren) MX> START (rev) Proceed If you If Step make a prints system Error: to many error 58. typing error and the MX> prompt. messages are press the Try again. repeatedly RETURN printed, key, the the tape could be bad. Press the front-end HALT switch and wait minute. Go back to Step 12. 1If the errors persist, ask ERROR: another tape. If error many messages are repeatedly printed, the one for tape could be bad. Type CTRL/\ and wait for the system to print the prompt KS10>. Return to Step 35 and start again. If the errors persist, ask for another tape. 2.5 CREATING With the files by SYSTEM system and running running, files the DIRECTORIES for DLUSER you testing program must create the system. from tape. directories You create to store these system directories CREATING ) Step 58: To be THE Give the Command: able to load files TOPS-20 (CAPABILITIES). of into Press SYSTEM ENABLE (CAPABILITIES). privileged and directories, give the ENABLE capabilities. Type ENABLE and press instead FILE the RETURN areas and command to the ESC key. key. The create user names obtain the reguired The system prints system prints a $ prompt and press @: (s @ENABLE | (CAPABILITIES) () $ W) Step 59: To run Give the Command: the DLUSER program the ESC key. The RETURN key. After prompt RUN (PROGRAM) MTAO:. from the magnetic tape, system prints (PROGRAM). you issue this command, type Type the RUN MTAO: and press system prints the the DLUSER>: ESC { N~ SRUN | (PROGRAM) MTAO0:(rer) DLUSER> Error: ERROR: If you receive an error message, rewind the tape, skip files, and reissue this command. If you are installing TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, when you type the command, skip four files. The following example shows to do this on a DECSYSTEM-20 for MTAQ: (DEVICE) SREWIND s ) | SSKTP (DEVICE) two the SKIP how MTAO: (ket) 2 FILES(wr) MTAO: arD) SRUN | (PROGRAM) _ MTAQ:(rer) DLUSER> B Step 60: To load type Give the DLUSER Command: the LOAD directory and MTAO: and prints DONE. press press and structure the LOAD (FROM FILE) MTAO:. from the ESC key. The the RETURN key. After the DLUSER prompt: tape system into the (FROM file system, few seconds, the Type system have not typing a pressed CTRL/U, the and RETURN reissue a prints FILE). TN FSC DLUSER>LOAD | (FROM FILE) MTAOQ:(Crer) DONE. DLUSER> Error: ERROR: If you mistype the command and key, delete the entire line by the command. CREATING If you follow mistyped the error If get a you not give type ENABLE, reissue the TOPS-20 command recovery group the the THE of give and pressed error command the command SYSTEM procedure JSYS ENABLE FILE in commands in this in the Step messages, you step Type in 58. the RETURN key, probably did 59. following two CTRL/Cs, example, and step: LS(¢ SREWIND (DEVICE) ?DEVICE $CLOSE 3 MTAO0: JFN? MTAO: MTA0: (R OPEN ON JFN 3 YES (R [OK] (s $SKIP (DEVICE) MTAO: 2 FILES(®1) (4 FILES for DECSYSTEM-2020) Crse) $RUN$(PROGRAM) MTAO : Crer) DLUSER> W) Step 61: Type Type EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. EXIT system and press prints the RETURN key to end the DLUSER program. The $: DLUSER> EXIT (1) $ 2.6 The RUNNING DUMPER TOPS-20 program file DECSYSTEM-20 B Step 62: The tape, TAPE places system. program the already FROM and files The the ESC positioned RETURN key. DUMPER prompt: is key. at After on tape system DUMPER> magnetic file on is the the tape fifth into file DECSYSTEM-2020 mounted on prints (PROGRAM). drive the DUMPER program, type the DUMPER program starts, s $ RUN (PROGRAM) the program on the the tape. RUN (PROGRAM) MTAO:. the The from DUMPER seventh Give the Command: DUMPER press DUMPER MTAO: (i) 0. MTAO: the Type Since RUN the tape and and press is the system prints the CREATING Error: ERROR: If you get errors, THE TOPS-20 the magnetic FILE SYSTEM was either tape not recorded properly or not positioned properly. Rewind the tape, skip four files, and try again. If you are installing the TOPS-20 software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, when you give the SKIP command, skip six files. The following lines show how to do this on a DECSYSTEM-20 for MTAOQ:. TIf the errors persist, contact DIGITAL Software Support. GO MTAO: (rer) (DEVICE) SREWIND ESC $SSKIP | (DEVICE) MTAO: 4 FILES(Cmr) ESC SRUN | (PROGRAM) MTAO:(xre) DUMPER> Bp Step 63: Give the DUMPER Command: Tell Type DUMPER TAPE MTAO: and which tape and press press the drive to use the ESC key. RETURN Cese) ¢ DUMPER>TAPE TAPE (DEVICE) key. (DEVICE) MTAO:. by giving the DUMPER command The system prints (DEVICE). The system prints reissue the the TAPE. Type DUMPER prompt: MTAO: (Crer) DUMPER> Error: If you make a typing error, command. ERROR: 2.7 RESTORING Restore the TOPS-20 files PS:<UETP.LIB> for from BUNDLED the the SOFTWARE directories FROM TAPE PS:<SYSTEM>, PS:<SUBSYS>, and tape. Give the DUMPER command FILES just before the RESTORE command if you want the system to print the file specification of each file it restores. The installation takes 1longer if you print this information. To stop printing each file specification, give the NO FILES (Refer command to Chapter explanation I’Efiep 64: after of 7 the of current the any messages RESTORE TOPS-20 that User DUMPER may Give the DUMPER Command: (TO) command RESTORE finishes. Utilities print (TAPE on Guide your FILES) for an terminal.) PS:<*>*% % * PS:<SYSTEM>* * *, To copy the TOPS-20 monitor and its related programs from tape to disk, give the DUMPER RESTORE command. Type RESTORE the ESC key. The system prints (TAPE FILES). Type PS: and magnetic and press press the ESC key. The system prints <*>* * * press ESC key. The system prints TEM>* * ,*, (TO), Type Press the PS:<SYS and RETURN key. the CREATING This DUMPER the directory system command prints restores END OF DUMPER>RESTORE TAPE LOADING END OF TOPS-20 all PS:<SYSTEM>. # 1, and FILE files all the SYSTEM in the the DUMPER first files save are FILES) "SYSTEM INTO PS:<*>* % * FILES FOR set to restored, the prompt: TSC | Ces) (TAPE FILES(S) the When SAVESET (Tesc) | DUMPER THE (TO) TOPS-20 PS:<SYSTEM>*.* *(rer) V4.1", WEDNESDAY 18-JUL-79 PS:<SYSTEM> SAVESET DUMPER> The system was written. Error: ERROR: prints If vyou tape is a header containing the date and time that the tape do type the correct input not positioned correctly, tape. FILE(S) CTRL/E, structure, PS:, or if the no files are restored from In this <case you will not see the message, LOADING INTO PS:<SYSTEM>. To correct this error, type give the following commands, and begin again at Step 64. @rur) | INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER> REWIND $DC YOU YES OR REALLY WANT TO ABORT YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? YES(rer) NO? DUMPER> Error: ERROR: If you do not type the correct structure and directory name, PS:<SYSTEM>, the files are restored to the wrong directory. To correct this error, type CTRL/E, give the following commands, and reissue the RESTORE command in this step. Be sure tc¢ delete and expunge the files 1in the incorrect directory. INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER>SKIP $DO YOU YES OR 0 REALLY WANT TO ABORT NO? YESCmn) YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? DUMPER> CAUTION The saveset you have just restored contains the TOPS20.BWR and TOPS20.DOC files. These files describe changes 1in the software made too late for inclusion in this manual. Read these files before continuing with your installation. To print terminal, the contents perform the of the TOPS20.BWR following steps: and TOPS20.DOC files on your 2150 CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM I’»Step 64A: Type CTRL/C and Press the RETURN Key. To exit CTRL/C from and the press DUMPER the program RETURN and to return to command level, type Key. G DUMPER> ~ C Crer) S W) STEP 64B: Give the TYPE Command: and To print the Press the contents the ESCAPE Key. PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR the entire contents | STYPE (FILE) RETURN of the of TOPS-20 The press and the TYPE To print press the the contents BEWARE entire | STYPE contents (FILE) RETURN of ESCAPE the file, type PE The TY and press (FILE). system will Type print file. and of (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC DOCUMENTATION The press the TYPE Key. TOPS-20 Key. PS:<KSYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC the BEWARE PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR(®r) Press the PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR system prints the RETURN Key. W) STEP 64C: Give the TYPE Command: and (FILE) Key. system the RETURN DOCUMENTATION file, prints Key. PE The type TY and (FILE), system will TYPE print File. PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC(xer) STOP Please read entirety these before files in <continuing their with your installation. ) Step 64D: Type CONTINUE and Press the RETURN Key. To return type to the CONTINUE DUMPER DUMPER and press prompt. SCONTINUE Crer)(rer) DUMPER> program the to RETURN proceed Key with twice. The vyour 1installation, system returns the CREATING m)Step 65: the RESTORE TOPS-20 Give the DUMPER Command: (TO) Restore THE and FILE SYSTEM RESTORE (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>* % * PS:<SUBSYS>*.* *, system press program files to the directory the key. The system prints ESC <SUBSYS>. (TAPE PS: and press the ESC key. The system prints <*>* % * (TO). PS:<SUB and press the ESC key. The system prints SYS>*.,*,*, the RETURN key. When all the files are restored, the system END OF SAVESET and DUMPER>RESTOERE the | DUMPER (TAPE OF Type Type Press prints prompt: FILES) PS:<*>* * * (TQO) DUMPER TAPE # 1, "SYSTEM FILES FOR TOPS-20 2153 LOADING FILE(S) INTO PS:<SUBSYS> END Type FILES). PS:<SUBSYS> Vv4.1" *, * ,WEDNESDAY, *( 1) 18-JUL-79 SAVESET DUMPER> Error: ERROR: If you do not type the correct input structure, PS:, or if The tape is not positioned correctly, no files are restored from tape. In this <case vyou will not see the message, LOADING FILE(S) INTO PS:<SUBSYS>. To correct this error, type CTEL/E, give the following commands, and begin again at Step 64. INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER> REWIND(R1) $DO YOU REALLY WANT TO ABORT YES OR NO? YES G YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? DUMPER> Error: ERROR: If you forget to type the directory PS:<SUBSYS>, the files are restored to the wrong directory. Type CTRL/E, give the following commands to correct the error, and reissue the RESTORE command in this step. Be sure the files in the incorrect directory. to delete and expunge (CTRL/D INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER> SKIP $D0O YOU REALLY WANT TO ABORT YES OR NO? DUMPER> 0(wr) YESCRer) YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? CREATING mp Step 66: (TO) PS:<UETP.LIB>*, * *, and END OF SYSTEM RESTORE (TAPE FILES) the The system prints <*>* * * (TO). key. The system prints IB>*,*,*, files are restored, the system DUMPER DUMPER>RESTORE TAPE LOADING FILE the files into the directory <UETP.LIB>, type ESC key. The system prints (TAPE FILES). press the ESC key. and press the ESC key. When all the DUMPER TOPS-20 Give the DUMPER Command: To restore press the SAVESET THE # 1, FILE(S) RESTORE Type PS: and and Type PS:<UETP.L Press the RETURN prints END OF prompt: (TAPE "UETP INTO PS:<*>* * # FILES) FOR PS:<*>* *_ * RELEASE 4.1" (TO) ,MONDAY, PS:<UETP.LIB>*.* *ri) 23-NOV-82 2013 PS:<UETP.LIB> SAVESET DUMPER> Error: ERROR: If you do not type the correct input structure, PS:, or if the tape is not positioned correctly, no files are restored from tape. In this case you will not see the message, LOADING FILE(S) INTO PS:<UETP.LIB>. To correct this error, type CTRL/E, give the following commands, and begin again at Step 64. | INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER>REWIND (rer) $DO YOU YES OR REALLY WANT NO? TO ABORT YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? YES DUMPER> Error: If ERROR: files to the wrong directory. Type CTRL/E to stop DUMPER, give the SKIP 0 command, and reissue the RESTORE command. Be sure to delete and expunge the files in the incorrect you forget to type PS:<UETP.LIB>, the system restores the directory. INTERRUPTING. .. DUMPER>SKIP $DO YOU YES OR 0(wi) REALLY NO? WANT TO ABORT YOUR INTERRUPTED COMMAND? YES(wmD) DUMPER> WP Step 67: Type EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. Type EXIT the TOPS-20 and press enabled DUMPER>EXIT(re1) $ the RETURN prompt: key to end DUMPER. The system prints CREATING THE mp Step 68: TOPS-20 UNLOAD Give the Command: FILE (DEVICE) SYSTEM MTAO:. type tape drive, the from To remove the TOPS-20 Installation tape Type MTAQ: The system prints (DEVICE). UNLOAD and press the ESC key. The system rewinds the tape onto the source and press the RETURN key. reel. SUNLOAD $ MTAO: (DEVICE) You may now remove the TOPS-20 Installation tape from the tape drive. If Error: system prints: the ERROR: $Device open $Kill lower in lower fork fork? type YES5 and press the RETURN key. The system unloads your DISK-USAGE (OF tape. #) Step 69: Give the DIRECTORY) Command: PS:<*> INFORMATION (ABOUT) and Press the RETURN Key. If you give the command INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY) size of every directory on the the the system will print PS:<*>, a wusing The example below was obtained PS:. public structure, Values for a DECSYSTEM-2020 are shown in 2040. Model DECSYSTEM-20, that there are two directories You will notice ]). brackets ([ These directories should have and <NEW-SUBSYS>. <NEW-SYSTEM> called no files associated with them. They were created by the monitor and will be used in the event you update your system to a newer release of the TOPS-20 operating system. Ces) SINFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY) PS:<*>(riT) PS : <ROOT-DIRECTORY> 54 Pages assigned +INF Working pages, PS:<ACCOUNTS> 6 Pages assigned +INF Working pages, [58 Pages for a DECSYSTEM-202C] +INF Permanent pages allowed [4 Pages for a DECSYSTEM-2020] +INF Permanent pages allowed PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS> 0 Pages assigned +INF Working pages, +INF Permanent pages allowed PS: <KNEW-SYSTEM> 0 Pages assigned +INF Working pages, +INF Permanent pages allowed PS:<OPERATCOR> 0 Pages asscigned 250 Working pages, 250 Permanent pages allowed PS:<SPOOL> 0 Pages assigned +INF Working pages, +INF Permanent pages allowed 2-39 CREATING THE TOPS-20 FILE SYSTEM PS:<SUBSYS> 2513 Pages +INF Working assigned pages, [2416 +INF Pages for Permanent a DECSYSTEM-2020] pages allowed PS:<SYSTEM> 2640 Pages +INF Working assigned pages, 2680 +INF Pages for Permanent a DECSYSTEM-2020] pages allowed PS:<UETP> 0 Pages assigned 100000 Working pages, 100000 Permanent pages allowed PS:<UETP.LIB> 1732 Pages 4000 Working assigned pages, 4000 Permanent pages allowed PS:<UETP.RUN> 0 Pages 500 assigned Working Total 60187 of pages, 500 Permanent 6947 Pages assigned, [6890 Pages for PAGES FREE ON a in pages 11 allowed directorles. DECSYSTEM-2020] PS: $ Error: ERROR: If the "Pages approximately assigned"” match the value derived from the Installation tape, some correctly. (six fi1les 62. for each directory value shown 1n this shown manual do or not the directory listing shipped with your files may not have been copiled Mount the tape again on for a DECSYSTEM-2020), and MTAO:, begin skip four agaln at files Step CHAPTER TAILORING After you have installed Installation tape, tailor THE 3 SYSTEM the bundled vyour system TOPS-20 for your software from specific needs. the You must: If 1. Select a 2. Change the 3. Set terminal speeds; define remote 1lines, system 1logical names, magnetic tape drive parameters, line printer parameters, time zone, file archiving and migration recycle periods, and accounting shift parameters; and enable or disable directory parameter setting, account validation, class scheduling, working set swapping, latency optimization, and tape drive allocation. All these parameters are located in the system parameter file PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. 4, Change the operator's 5. Create the directory 6. Create the PS:<SYSTEM>LPFORM.INI you are chapter 3.1 At the this most a time A are at correct or your for your system. name. password and user group. PS:<REMARKS>. of Step file. perform all the steps in this 86. MONITOR running 2040, is DECSYSTEM-2020 TOPS-20 closely meets supports a exception you 2020, that system tailoring with SELECTING have monitor the 2050. system's TOPS-20 You should monitor now MONSML.EXE select requirements. the Choose a 1if you monitor that monitor that least: 1. As much memory supports 1less correctly. 2. The number of terminal lines you need. operator's console in this number. terminal lines and remote lines. Do Just not count the count the local 3. The run, plus number of as your system memory than your user jobs that you contains. A monitor that system contains does not run plan to operator job and job 0). For example, if 20 user jobs, the monitor you select should 22 jobs. two you expect support at (one to run least TAILORING THE SYSTEM 4. The number of pseudo-terminals that you need. The system needs at least two pseudo-terminals, one to run the PTYCON program which in turn usually runs the operator program OPR, and one for unplanned situations that may arise. For example, if you want to run five pseudo-terminals in your batch system, you need a monitor that supports at least seven pseudo-terminals. 5. The All monitors timesharing fewer number are and resources of peripheral devices stored in the directory batch concurrently. Do than you need, or a on your system. PS:<SYSTEM>. not select a monitor that They monitor all that run has is unnecessarily listed below. Be (i.e., 2020, large. The TOPS-20 sure the 2040, or If you 2040 or monitors and their characteristics are monitor you select is for your type of system 2050) are installing 2050, copy one MONSML. EXE A the of TOPS-20 the small supports 40 64 20 256K 8 2 1l 80 MONMED. EXE A 60 128 30 256K 8 2 1l 80 DECSYSTEM-20 to Model A MONITR.EXE: monitor. This monitor jobs lines pseudo~-terminals of memory magnetic tape drives line printers card reader million words of disk storage (four RP04 or two RP06,o0r two RP20 spindles) structure pages up for swapping timesharing space monitor. This monitor to: jobs 1lines pseudo-terminals of memory magnetic tape drives 1line printers <card reader million words of disk RP04, two RP06, or two per 7030 a to: medium-size supports on monitors timesharing up per 5035 software following structure pages for swapping space storage (four RP20 spindles) TAILORING MONBCH. EXE Batch 14 8 12 256K 8 2 1 80 7030 A large supports 100 128 30 512K 8 2 1 80 7000 If you one of are the SYSTEM size medium a for monitor batch-oriented A This monitor allows a five-stream configuration. least one timesharing job. batch system and at The MONBIG.EXE THE monitor supports A small supports 20 32 20 256K 8 1 1 80 5035 to: jobs lines pseudo-terminals of memory magnetic tape drives line printers card reader million words of disk storage (four RP04 or two RP06 disk drives) per structure pages for swapping space timesharing up This monitor. monitor to: jobs lines pseudo-terminals of memory magnetic tape drives line printers card reader million words of disk storage RP04, or two RP06) per structure pages for swapping space installing the TOPS-20 software on following monitors to MONITR.EXE: 2020-MONSML. EXE up DECSYSTEM-2020, This monitor. timesharing up a (four copy monitor to: jobs lines pseudo-terminals of memory magnetic line card tape drives printer reader million words RM03, or two pages for of RP06) swapping disk per storage structure space (four TAILORING THE SYSTEM timesharing medium- size monitor s upports up to: 2020-MONMED. EXE A monitor. This jobs lines pseudo-terminals of memory magnetic tape drives line printer card reader million words 6500 If you part are of installing the ARPA the TOPS-20 network, RMO3, or pages for two of disk RP06) swapping per storage (four structure space software on a DECSYSTEM-2020 that one of the following monitors cop y is to MONITR.EXE: 2020-ARPA-MONSML. EXE A small supports t imesharing up monitor. This monitor to: jobs lines pseudo-terminals NVT's of memory magnetic tape line printer card drives reader million words of disk storage (four RMO3, or two RP06) per structure 5035 2020-ARPA-MONMED. EXE pages size A medium monitor s upports for swapping space timesharing up monitor. This to: jobs lines pseudo-terminals NVT's of memory magnetic tape line printer card reader million words 6500 RMO3, or pages for two drives of disk storage (four per structure RP06) swapping space. TAILORING W) Step 70: Give the Command: THE SYSTEM CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>. Connect to the PS:<SYSTEM> directory by typing CONNECT and pressing the ESC key. The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). Type PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN $ CONNECT key: (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> (rir) $ W) Step 71: Give the Command: COPY (FROM) montyp.EXE (TO) MONITR.EXE. Copy the monitor that you have selected to the file MONITR.EXE. Type COPY and press the ESC key. The system prints (FROM). Type the name of the monitor that you have selected and press the ESC key. The system ©prints the generation number and (TO). Type MONITR.EXE and press the RETURN key. s | $COPY (FROM) montyp.EXE.l (TO) MONITR.EXE (1) montyp.EXE.1 => MONITR.EXE.1l [OK] The different TOPS-20 2040/2050 monitors are: TOPS-20 2020 TOPS-20 2020 ARPANET MONSML.EXE | 2020-MONSML.EXE | 2020-ARPA-MONSML. EXE MONMED.EXE | 2020-MONMED.EXE |2020-ARPA-MONMED.EXE MONBCH.EXE MONBIG.EXE Error: 3.2 If you type the wrong name, CHANGING THE Whenever a INFORMATION similar user reissue the command. SYSTEM NAME types (ABOUT) CTRL/C VERSION before command, 1logging the in system or gives the prints a message to: TOPS-20 SMALL SYSTEM, TOPS-20 MONITOR 4.1 (5443) You can change the system name "TOPS-20 SMALL SYSTEM" by entering the name vyou want into the file PS:<SYSTEM>MONNAM.TXT. If the name NO 1IS) (MODE TERMINAL contains lowercase letters, give the command RAISE before entering The text of the the name. system name can contain up practical purposes, it should not exceed single 72-character line of terminal output. show how to change the system name to to 105 characters. For 32 characters to fit on a The following two steps "Installation-test System.” TAILORING I’Ehep 72: Give the Command: THE SYSTEM TERMINAL (MODE IS) NO RAISE. If you want lowercase letters in the system name, type TERMINAL and press the ESC key. The system prints (MODE IS). Type NO RAISE and press the RETURN key. Make sure the CAPS LOCKED button on the terminal is not depressed. The system prints $. (MODE STERMINAL $ B Step 73: NO RAISE(rir) IS) Give the Command: COPY (FROM) TTY: type-system-name-here “Z. the ESC key. Type COPY and press (TO) MONNAM.TXT The system prints (FROM). Type TTY: Type MONNAM.TXT and The system prints (TO). the ESC key. press and press the RETURN key. The system is now waiting for you to type the new of your name system. After you enter the new system name, press the RETURN key; then type a CTRL/Z. The system prints "%, followed example below, we use Installation-test the In prompt. $ the by System as the new system GO Scopy (FROM) TTY: => tty: | name. (TO) monnam.txtCre) MONNAM.TXT.1 Installation-test System Y/ $ You can change this file at any time, but the system reads the system name only when the monitor is started (whenever you boot the system). mp Step 74: Give the Command: COPY (FROM) type-short-system-name-here “Z. TTY: (TO) TAPNAM.TXT the on written be You should also change the system name that will of any tape initialized by users of the system. 1label header volume file the into want you name the entering by this Do P5:<SYSTEM>TAPNAM.TXT. This system name must be of ten or fewer characters, so you will probably have to abbreviate the name given in the previous step. The following step shows how to change the system name appearing on tape labels written by the system to "Instal-tst". $COPY | TTY:=> (FROM) TTY: | (TO) TAPNAM.TXT.1 Instal-tst(re) TAPNAM.TXT(Re) TAILORING 3.3 CREATING SYSTEM DEFAULTS IN THE SYSTEM 4-1-CONFIG.CMD You must create the file PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD parameters define system speeds ¢ Terminal line e Logical names e Magnetic tape @ Line e Local e Directory parameter e Account ® Performance @ Scheduler @ File archiving e Tape drive allocation ® Accounting shift drives printers zone time setting validation improvements controls and migration changes The next time the system starts, Defaults) to for: program program runs uses the SETSPD System (SET Parameter the parameters entered into this file. This system startup. automatically at through 3.3.1 The formats of the commands are described in Sections they are preceded by if lines include comment You may 3.3.13. exclamation points. #pStep 75: Give the Command: CREATE (FILE) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. TOPS-20 the to (Refer Use EDIT to create the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. create To EDIT.) use to how on information more for Guide User's EDIT The ESC key. the and press the file 4—-1-CONFIG.CMD, type CREATE Type 4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the RETURN key. (FILE). system prints 4-1-CONFIG.CMD.l and line number 00100: The system prints Input: (s) SCREATE Input: (FILE) 4-1-CONFIG.CMDCreT) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1 00100 Do not confuse the CREATE command, which CTRL/E CREATE command, 3.3.1 Setting Terminal creates which creates a directory. a file, with the Speeds TERMINAL the reads SETSPD program Whenever the system starts, the commands from PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and sets the terminal lines to the specified speeds. TAILORING Users can change (MODE IS) SPEED the speeds command. of THE their When one SYSTEM terminals user logs in on the same terminal, the system does not back to the default listed in 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. However, after The if the the line operator line is can is defined as REMOTE, by out giving and change the the TERMINAL another the speed is user logs 1line speed changed back disconnected. change the speed of the line by giving the CTRL/E SET command. To set the following default format TERMINAL speed into line for a particular line, enter range of a command in the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD: SPEED input Item output Identifies line An octal line line-1line. number, Your or a DIGITAL Field lines in the form Service Representative will provide you with a list of line numbers and corresponding locations. (Refer to Section 1.1.) input The input (to output The output the speed specify an system assumes system) of output that the speed of terminal(s). speed along with the output speed input speed. The terminal input be the same on a DECSYSTEM-2020. Valid terminal 0 (to speeds shut off terminal(s). If an is and you input the output do not speed, same the as speeds the must are: the line) 300 50 600 75 1200 110 134 the the 1800 (actually 134.5) 2400 150 4800 200 9600 NOTE If you line, and do not the specify system output. terminal If you should speed of one are always greater than 1lines (the a that for both are 1in DH11 DZ11 a input the on on not a a installed, define those 1lines with a 0. Otherwise, the lines run open, causing performance. numbers speed for have and DECSYSTEM-2020) always you a 300 controller DECSYSTEM-20 Line uses degradation octal, the and the highest 1in system console terminal line number. below, for line numbers for the DECSYSTEM-20, line numbers for the DECSYSTEM-2020. and line Refer to to Table number is Table 3-1, 3-2 for TAILORING THE Table SYSTEM 3-1 Terminal Line Numbers DECSYSTEM-20 Number of Lines (Decimal) 1 1l 1 1 1 8 16 32 64 96 Console Line Number (Octal) Timesharing Line Numbers (Octal) to to to to to 11 21 41 101 141 10 20 40 100 140 Table 3-2 Terminal Line Numbers DECSYSTEM-2020 Number of Lines (Decimal) Timesharing Line Numbers (Octal) 8 16 32 2 to 11 2 to 21 2 to 41 mp Step 76: Console Line Number (Octal) 12 22 42 Type the TERMINAL SPEED Commands. Type your required TERMINAL SPEED commands. You can include comment The file lines by preceding each of them with an exclamation point. definitions useful most the Determine entered below is an example. for the system according to the terminals that you have. 00100 00200 00300 00400 ! Terminal Speeds(xD) ! Line 1 has input=9600 and output=9600(rr) TERMIMNAL 1 SPEED 9600 Rer) ! Lines 2 to 20 have input and output=2400(xre) 00500 TERMINAL 2-20 SPEED 2400Cwr1) 00600 ! Lines 23 to 40 do not exist(re) 00700 TERMINAL 23-40 SPEED O(rer) 00800 3.3.2 Defining Dial-Up (REMOTE) Lines For each dial-up line, you have the option of declaring that line to On the DECSYSTEM-20 you may declare a line to have a specified speed. at Iline, an autobaud is declared line dial-up a If be autobaud. system startup the line will be automatically set to 300 baud. AUTO To declare a line autobaud, replace the word SPEED with the word specify any input and output not do and TERMINAL command the in speeds. TAILORING THE Include as If a TERMINAL command for each described above, but insert the you do not use the AUTO argument system On a assumes that DECSYSTEM-2020 command format TERMINAL the the output input SYSTEM dial-up word and speed and line. REMOTE omit is output the Use after the the the output same as speed must be line REMOTE SPEED input form number. speed, the is: same line input the the speed. same. The output or TERMINAL Whenever line a user specified, the specified in ’Step 77: If you starts remote Service determine lines, The a correct 00800 ! TERMINAL 01000 TERMINAL Lines Insert a names only) line, and of that speed mp Step 78: any the and 21 22 line and AUTO has not been to the speed 1line are commands for your 22 are REMOTE REMOTE Logical dialup your proper only own an DIGITAL commands in example. You system. lines(rir) SPEED 300(Cri1) AUTO(®i) (for DECSYSTEM-20 only) Names the following format you require. These The command format to define logical any names special are system defined when is: definition-1list to PS:<SUBSYS> User's Guide if you describes do not define logical it names. Type System Logical Name Definitions. system entered definitions for logical below your name are own definitions examples. -into You system. 01100 DEFINE NEW: 01200 DEFINE OLD: PS:<OLD>,SYS:(wr) 01300 DEFINE HLP: SYS:(wr) 01400 from the below in name numbers enter entered logical name SYS: defaults 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. The TOPS-20 lines dial-up that starts. DEFINE 21 System command system Enter DECSYSTEM-20 the obtain lines 00900 logical in on sets Representative the Defining The (for 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. 3.3.3 the job system 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. must a AUTO Define REMOTE Lines. have Field REMOTE PS:<NEW>,SYS:(rei) must 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. determine the The correct TAILORING 3.3.3.1 default files THE SYSTEM Selecting an Editor - You have the editing program (editor) with which using the CREATE and EDIT commands. option of your users If you want selecting create and them to the edit use TV, the new editor especially suited to display terminals, enter the command, DEFINE EDITOR: SYS:TV.EXE into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. If you do not put this command into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, the default editor used for the CREATE and EDIT commands will be the EDIT program, as 1in previous releases of TOPS-20. By defining logical name EDITOR: for their own jobs, users can override your choice of default editor, as long as the editor they specify is available at your installation. The following your M) Step 79: If step is an example of making TV the default editor for installation. you DEFINE Type DEFINE EDITOR: are using EDITOR: 01400 the editor SYS:TV.EXE DEFINE EDITOR: SYS:TV.EXE and Press the RETURN Key. TV as and your system's the RETURN default key. press editor, type SYS:TV.EXE(rer) 01500 NOTE If you want to be the releases DEFINE your Defining Magnetic default as in editor previous of TOPS-20, do not put EDITOR: command into 4-1-CONFIG.CMD 3.3.4 system's EDIT program, any the file. Tape Logical The system assigns logical unit starts with the lowest numbered Unit numbers unit on Numbers to magnetic tape drives. It the lowest numbered controller on the lowest numbered channel, and proceeds upward. If the cabling connecting the tape drives to the system changes, the logical unit numbers referencing the tape drives can also change, unless you enter the appropriate commands in 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. The commands 1in 4-1-CONFIG.CMD guarantee that the physical drives always have the same logical unit numbers. Request the tape drive serial numbers from your DIGITAL Field Service Representative, or open the back door of the magnetic tape drives and look on the sticker containing the number. Use the last four digits of the number. Enter a MAGTAPE command in the following format into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD MAGTAPE unit file: serial slave Item unit Identifies The logical drive. unit The number unit number that you can be wish 0, 1, to assign 2, 3, 4, to 5, the 6, 7. serial slave The last four digits (Leading 0s may The of tape type be of the serial number. omitted.) drive, 3-11 e.g., TU70, TU71, TU72, TU4S. or TAILORING THE SYSTEM NOTE If no system slave number 1is entered, the assumes that the slave number is TU45. l} Step 80: Define Magnetic Tape Drive Logical Unit Numbers. 01400 01500 01600 01700 01800 MAGTAPE MAGTAPE MAGTAPE MAGTAPE MAGTAPE SHwNhhHHO Enter the definitions of the magnetic tape drive logical unit numbers into 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. The commands entered below are only examples. You must determine the correct definitions for your system. 24 2001 2002 2003 1500 TU45Crel) TU7 7R TU71(Re) TU70(Rer) TU72CRE) 01900 3.3.5 Defining Line Printer Parameters The characteristics of the six possible 1line printers that <can be ordered with vyour DECSYSTEM-20 are listed in Table 3-3, below. Ask your DIGITAL Field Service Representative which type of 1line printer you have. Table DECSYSTEM-20 Model VFU 3-3 Line Printers Identification Lowercase LP20A LP20B PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE NO YES Four buttons on right top panel, the with LP20C LP20D PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE NO YES Four buttons on right top panel, the with LP20F LP20H TAPE TAPE NO YES Four the the top button being POWER ON ALARM/CLEAR the top button being POWER ON ALARM/CLEAR panel rocker switches on 1left of the top TAILORING THE 3-4 Line Table DECSYSTEM-2020 Model VFU LP20A LP20B SYSTEM Printers Lowercase PROGRAMMABLE PROGRAMMABLE Identification NO YES Four buttons on right top panel, the top POWER ON LP20C PROGRAMMABLE NO LP20D PROGRAMMABLE YES Sections 3.3.5.1 and 3.3.5.1 Specifying buttons on right top panel, the top button 3.3.5.2 describe how to the VFU File button being ALARM/CLEAR Four POWER - The VFU ON install the with the with being ALARM/CLEAR the line printer. (Vertical Formatting Unit) is used to control paper advance through the line printer. For a line printer with a programmable VFU, place & command in 4-1-CONFIG.CMD that specifies the file to program the VFU. For installation purposes, use SYS:NORMAL.VFU. PRINTER n LOWERCASE VFU The command is: dev:<dir>name.typ Item . Identifies n The LOWERCASE Specifies that the printer has the 96-character set. If vyour printer has the 64-character set, do not include the word unit number LOWERCASE You format in file specified type dev:<dir>name.typ The location of need VFU Examples of For an PRINTER typical LP20A 0 VFU commands VFU and for commands LP20F in the the VFU and LP20H by LP20C SYS:NORMAL.VFU the command. file. line 4-1-CONFIG.CMD SYS:NORMAL.VFU For an LP20B and LP20D PRINTER 0 LOWERCASE VFU printer. command. The not the the VFU do of of printers, file are: TAILORING I"Step 8l: If the you THE SYSTEM Type the VFU Command. have one or appropriate 01900 02000 more line PRINTER printers commands PRINTER 0 LOWERCASE PRINTER 1 VFU in with programmable VFUs, enter 4-1-CONFIG.CMD: VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU(Re) SYS:NORMAL.VFU(krer) 02100 3.3.5.2 Specifying the RAM File - You must identify a file load the translation RAM (random—-access memory). controls the way each character is treated by the line SYS:LP96.RAM for SYS:LP64.RAM command for format PRINTER 1line printers printers that that do not 1lowercase 1lowercase will file Use letters. Use letters. The is: n LOWERCASE RAM dev:<dir>name.typ Item Identifies n The LOWERCASE Specifies line printer LOWERCASE the command. file specified in of dev:<dir>name.typ The file that For an LP20A, PRINTER 0 RAM commands LP20F RAM the contains not the include by has printer the the has the command. translation 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file the word RAM. are: LP20C SYS:LP64.RAM For an LP20B, LP20H PRINTER 0 LOWERCASE ‘Step 82: or in do your set, type typical printer If 64-character The of number. the set. RAM Examples unit that 96-character Enter have have that This RAM ©printer. or LP20D RAM SYS:LP96.RAM Type the RAM Command. the RAM command into 4-1-CONFIG.CMD: 02100 PRINTER 0 LOWERCASE 02200 PRINTER 1 RAM RAM SYS:LP96.RAM(wmr1) SYS:LP64.RAM(Rir) 02300 3.3.6 The as Defining time zone the number the in Local Time which your of hours Zone installation is located can be represented or east of Greenwich. For example, west Eastern Standard Time is zone 5, Central Standard Time is zone Mountain Standard Time is zone 7, and Pacific Standard Time is zone 6, To in set your local 4-1-CONFIG.CMD: TIMEZONE n time zone, you can enter the following command 8. TAILORING THE SYSTEM where n is a decimal number between -12 and 12 inclusive. Zones =12 and 12 represent the same clock time but on opposite sides of the international date line. If vyou do not specify a time zone 1in 4-1-CONFIG.CMD, the time 2zone will default to zone 0, signifying Greenwich I"Step 83: Enter the mean Type the TIMEZONE Command. TIMEZONE 02300 02400 3.3.7 time. command TIMEZONE Directory into 4-1-CONFIG.CMD: 5(G&eD) Parameter Setting You have the option of allowing users to change their directory parameters. If you decide to allow users to do this, no command is entered into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, because the system default 1is: ENABLE DIRECTORY--PARAMETER-SETTING. However, if vyou decide not to allow users to change their directory parameters, you should enter the command: DISABLE DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. When this command is given, it prevents the user from changing any of his directory parameters unless he has WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities. The following step is an example of disallowing users from changing ) Step 84: their Type directory Press the To prevent wusers from changing their directory parameters, DISABLE DIRECTORY--PARAMETER-SETTING and press the RETURN key. type RETURN 02400 DISABLE parameters. DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING key. and DISABLE DIRECTORY-PARAMETER-SETTING(Rre) 02500 NOTE If 3.3.8 Account the default 1is allowed directory to change parameters DIRECTORY commands. taken, some with users of the are their SET Validation You have the option of requiring all users to name when they are logging in to the system. valid accounts, you do not have to enter 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, because ACCOUNT-VALIDATION. However, if enter a valid account If you decide to require any command into the the system you decide not default 1is: ENABLE to validate accounts, you must enter the command: DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. The following step is an example of not using the account validation facility. TAILORING THE Type DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATION and Press the RETURN Key. mp Step 85: 02500 ACCOUNT-VALIDATION key. RETURN the press DISABLE type If you are not validating accounts, and SYSTEM DISABLE ACCOUNT-VALIDATIONC( Rer ) 02600 3.3.9 Performance Improvements full Sections 3.3.9.1 and 3.3.9.2 discuss working set swapping, Full Latency Optimization 3.3.9.1 latency optimization and - When the respectively. (FOR DECSYSTEM-20 ONLY) the 1into is entered FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION ENABLE command, pages read to 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, the number of revolutions needed off the disk is minimized. NOTE performance this use can you Before your from obtain must you feature, DIGITAL Field Service Representative the your about information following hardware. 1. 2. 3. 1If you have a KL10-C must be at revision If you have a KL10-E must be at revision processor, level processor, level it 11. it 3. be If you have board M7772, it must 1level E and CS revision version at Dboard have may you or level F; M7786. If your hardware does not meet the above requirements, take the system default, FULL-LATENCYDISABLE is, which OPTIMIZATION. I"Step 86: Type ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION and Press Key hardware your If (for DECSYSTEM-20 meets only). above the requirements, FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION and press the RETURN key. 02600 the RETURN ENABLE type ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION(&er) 02700 3.3.9.2 Working Set Swapping ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING, - If the entire working set of a process when on a it the command, is entered in the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, is brought 1is the process's turn to run. page-by-page basis. into Otherwise, memory at once this action occurs TAILORING THE SYSTEM NOTE You should enable working set swapping only if your system runs large compute-bound Jjobs. If vyour system instead runs many interactive jobs or if you are unsure which description better fits your system, take the system default, which DISABLE QStep 87: is: WORKING-SET-PRELOADING Type ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING and Press the RETURN Key. (&) ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING 02700 02800 3.3.10 Scheduler Controls Sections 3.3.10.1 scheduling, and describe 3.3.10.2 bias Bias Controls - You have the option 3.3.10.1 controls and class respectively. of deciding how your system's CPU time is to be divided between interactive and batch jobs. 4-1-CONFIG.CMD the You do this by entering the command, BIAS n, into file, where n is any integer between 1 and 20. The smaller the value of n, the larger the percentage of CPU time given to interactive jobs. If you do not give this command, a default value of 11 will be taken, calling for equal division of time between interactive and batch jobs. »Step 88: Type the BIAS n Command. The example below shows how to enter a BIAS n command with a value of 6, which favors interactive jobs. You must determine the correct value of n 02800 for your own system. BIAS 6(x) 02900 3.3.10.2 Class Scheduling - You can use class scheduling to divide Class Jobs. of classes different among time CPU system's your to according Jjobs to time CPU of scheduling assigns percentages account number or according to a policy program written for your site. NOTE If you do scheduling, command because not want you do not to have use class to enter any file, 4-1-CONFIG.CMD the into DISABLF the system default is: CLASS-SCHEDULING. 3-17 TAILORING If you use CPU time The kind of class scheduling you can allocate any unused (windfall) among active jobs, or withhold it from all jobs. command for The class ENABLE for enabling WITHHELD. and you should scheduling is: withholding program, accounts, If command and POLICY-PROGRAM two enabling windfall ALLOCATED. policy SYSTEM either allocating program THE If skip class windfall vyou cannot to using a policy CLASS-SCHEDULING scheduling 1is: enable also Section using ENABLE <class enable 3.3.11 program a policy CLASS-SCHEDULING scheduling <class after and POLICY-PROGRAM wusing scheduling giving one a using of these commands. you your do not site, have you a can classes according (Refer to policy program to still enable class the account under to Chapter 6 of the use with class scheduling which TOPS-20 by each System scheduling assigning job is at jobs to running. Manager's Guide for information about associating accounts with particular classes.) To do this you must first enter commands into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, specifying the class. percentage of CPU time that is to be given to jobs 1in each The command, CREATE 1 in <c¢lass 1 are be You must enter use, with they the may a a percentages supply you add Enter CREATE to of that total of for each percentage must less CPU a command specify up specifies given not than time add 100%. that is jobs 20% If not correct class numbers and under your system's class that your for up running of to class. The more than 100%, up less they add assigned to accounts CPU becomes sum for than part your will of the although are an example of classes of jobs. percentages time. system each windfall. The following commands the system's CPU time among three the ’Step 89: .20, different percentage system's up 75% of to own 100%, of the dividing You must system. Enter CREATE Commands for Scheduler Classes. CREATE commands for your 02900 CREATE 1 .20(®0D) 03000 CREATE 2 .40CwD) 03100 CREATE 3 .15(wn) system's classes into 4-1-CONFIG.CMD. 03200 Batch the jobs can choose for batch batch Jjobs the account following and be put BATCH-CLASS into a special command, jobs. If where you do class n not is of their the enter own number a of by including the class BATCH-CLASS 25% of CPU time to this 03200 03300 with The jobs class. Enter the BATCH-CLASS n Command and Assign a this you command, are given CPU time according to the class associated of the Jjob's owner at the time of submission. commands are an example of creating a class for batch assigning *Step 90: n Percentage to Class. BATCH-CLASS 4 (xer) CREATE 4 .25Cker) 03400 Now you must enter the command that accounts. You must also decide time jobs that are running to the default for this take this default. command 1is enables whether or to to <c¢lass allocate withhold ALLOCATED. It is this scheduling any wusing windfall windfall. recommended that CPU The you TAILORING THE SYSTEM ALLOCATED Type ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS m) Step 91: the RETURN and Press Key. class Now you actually enable scheduling by giving the following command. 03400 ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED (rer) 03500 CAUTION the Do not enter the above command into have you until file 4-1-CONFIG.CMD this 1in shown commands the entered create scheduler classes. that section before scheduling class If you enable creating 3.3.11 classes, class scheduling will function properly. not File Archiving and Migration Parameters Sections 3.3.11.1 and 3.3.11.2 describe tape recycle periods with the new file archiving and migration features. 3.3.11.1 Tape Archive Recycle Period - TOPS-20 allows for use off-line storage of selected files on magnetic tape for long periods of time. You can specify the amount of time files are to be saved by inserting a command into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file stating, in days, the recycle period of the tapes. For example, to save archival files on tape for five years, you would enter the command, ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD If you do not insert an 1825 (5 years x 365 days/year = 1825 days). 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, a the in command PERIOD PE-RECYCLE ARCHIVE-TA default value of 3650 m) Step 92: (ten years) will be taken. Type the ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD n Command. The example below shows how to enter an ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD command with a value of 1825 (five years). suitable value of n for your own system. 3500 n You must determine a ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825(rer) 3600 3.3.11.2 Migration Tape Recycle Period - 01d or little-used files can be automatically stored on magnetic tape for short periods of time. You can specify the amount of time the files are to be saved by inserting a command into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file stating, in days, the recycle period of the tapes. For example, to save migrated files on command, the enter would you months, three for tape If you TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90 (3 months x 30 days/month = 90 days). do not insert a TAPE-RECYCLE- PERIOD command in the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, a default value of 180 (six months) will be taken. TAILORING mp Step 93: The SYSTEM Type the TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD n Command. example with value THE below a wvalue of n for 3600 shows how to enter of 90 (three your own system. TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD a TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD months). 90 You must determine n command a suitable (ru 3700 3.3.12 Tape Sections into Drive 3.3.12.1 effect, 3.3.12.1 and and tapes. To write the tape use this If do you to feature, of describe response not give of users which standard ASSIGN this who also command, and is, will allows your tapes, To the tape they treat to must read and insert the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD drives must will be labeled behave assigned tapes as file. as in using unlabeled Type the ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION Command. allow drives, allocation conditions. system vyou tapes. ) Step 94: drive error - TOPS-20 provides automatic wish to read or write magnetic into your that tape certain 1labeled command, TOPS-20; putting to Allocation TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION releases TOPS-20 a Drive drives 1labels ENABLE previous Tape of command, 3.3.12.2 specifying Enabling assignment the Allocation labeled type 3700 tape ENABLE ENABLE processing and the automatic assignment of tape TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION and press the RETURN key. TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATIO (®r) N 3800 3.3.12.2 Treatment allocation 1in system should example by the system erased, into system and specifying to you the of Unrecognized Tapes - If you enabled tape drive the ©previous step, vyou must decide what action the take if a 1labeled tape is mounted improperly, for 4-1-CONFIG.CMD will will treat continue To force mounted, 3800 3900 wrong label type or density. If you want tape so that it cannot be accidentally the command, TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD, file. improperly processing TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS ’Step 95: the unload the must insert If you mounted them. do not labeled That is, give this tapes the as command, unlabeled system the tapes default 1is REGARD-AS-UNLABELED. Type the TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD Command. the type automatic unloading of any TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS tapes UNLOAD UNLOAD(rer) and that are press the improperly RETURN key. TAILORING THE SYSTEM Accounting Shift Changes 3.3.13 for The accounting facility allows you to provide varied billing rates into commands entering by this do You times. nt differe system use at the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file specifying the time of day for each rate You should give one command for each time the rate changes. change. and ALL, and Use days of the week or keywords WEEKDAYS, WEEKENDS, Chapter 6 of the (Refer to times in either 24-hour or AM/PM format. about ion informat detailed for Guide TOPS-20 System Manager's rates for accounting shift changes.) The example below allows special and times evenings and weekends. You must provide the correct days for your own I’Efiep 96: system. FEnter CHANGE Commands for Accounting Shift Changes. 9:00 WEEKDAYS(rer) 3900 CHANGE 4000 CHANGE 17:00 WEEKDAYS(xer) 4100 CHANGE 0:00 SATURDAY(®1) 4200 NOTE You do not have to enter CHANGE commands If you do into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. the , commands CHANGE any enter not change feature of shift accounting system accounting .Step 97: is not used. Press the ESC Key, Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. the Press the ESC key to end insert mode. Type EU and epress S$: and filenam the prints system The key to save the file. 04200 S RETURN | *EU G [4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1] $ m)Step 98: Give the Command: TYPE (FILE) <SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. TYPE and To be sure that the file is in the proper directory, type Type (FILE). prints system The key. SC the press prints system The key. RETURN the PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the contents of the file on your terminal. TAILORING THE SYSTEM GO STYPE (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD(rir) ! Termi nal ! Line 1 TERMINA L ! Lines 1 2 TERMINA L ! Lines Line input=9600 SPEED to 20 2-20 23 TERMINA L. ! Speeds has have SPEED to 40 23-40 21 9600 and shut are TERMINA L 22 REMOTE AUTO DEFINE NEW: PS:<NEW>,SYS: DEFINE OLD: PS:<OLD>,SYS: DEFINE HLP: SYS: MAGTAPE MAGTAPE TU4S 2001 TU77 2002 TU71 2003 TU70 HO MO 150000 PRINTER PRINTER PRINTER PRINTER TIMEZON E lines 300 WNMDHO SPEED MAGTAPE off dialup REMOTE MAGTAPE line output=2400 0 21 MAGTAPE and 2400 are TERMINA L 24 output=9600 Burke's input SPEED 22 and ! TU72 VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU LOWERCASE RAM RAM SYS:LP96.RAM SYS:LP64.RAM 5 ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING BIAS 6 CREATE 1 .20 CREATE 2 .40 CREATE 3 .15 BATCH-C LASS 4 CREATE 4 ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING .25 ACCOUNTS ARCHIVE -TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD TAPE-RE CYCLE-PERIOD ENABLE ALLOCATED 1825 90 TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION TAPE-RE COGNITION-ERRORS CHANGE CHANGE 9:00 WEEKDAYS 17:00 WEEKDAYS CHANGE 0:00 UNLOAD SATURDAY $ Remember, . Error: the If file the give shown system the above cannot following is just find COPY an the example. file or command <SYSTEM>: <) prints to the place wrong the file, file in CesO | _ SCOPY‘ (FROM) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD ki) (Refer to change the the TOPS-20 file.) EDIT Reference Manual if you want to TAILORING 3.4 CHANGING THE OPERATOR'S THE SYSTEM PASSWORD AND USER GROUP You may wish to change the operator's password from the widely your of phrase 39-alphanumeric-character a to DEC-20 publicized choosing. The password can of include a hyphen. Be sure to remember the or you will have to reinstall the system if you cannot think password the particular phrase that you typed. Test Environmental User the Also, in order for the operator to run Package, he must belong to the correct user group. This section describes how to change the operator's password and user group. “ECREATE Give the Command: QStep 99: Type CTRL/E the Press and CREATE, (DIRECTORY NAME) key. The PS:<OPERATOR> RETURN Key. and the press ESC system prints Type PS:<OPERATOR> and press the RETURN key. (DIRECTORY NAME). system prints [OLD], and then the subcommand prompt S$S. G The Crs) | $"ECREATE | (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<OPERATOR>(Cwi1) [OLD] $$ Give the Command: ’Step 100: RETURN PASSWORD Your Password and Press the Key. ESC the press and To insert the operator's new password, type PASS Type the new password and press the system prints WORD. The key. RETURN key. $S The system prints the subcommand prompt. vour PASSWORD password(rer) $S Give the Subcommand: I’>Step 101: RETURN USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 100 and Press the Key. The operator must be a member of user group 100 in order for him to Type USER-GROUP and press run the User Environmental Test Package. Type 100 and press the the ESC key. The system prints (NUMBER). key. RETURN CsO $$USER-GROUP (NUMBER) 100(xrD) $S %Group already exists, you If you see a message similar to: The operator 1is already a member may ignore this message. Error: ERROR: of the correct user group. mp Step 101A: Give the Subcommand: Go to Step 102. IPCF and Press the RETURN Key. To execute all privileged IPCF functions, type the subcommand IPCF and press the RETURN $SIPCF(rii) $$ Key. TAILORING »Step To 102: Press return to the the RETURN TOPS-20 THE SYSTEM Key. command level, press the RETURN key. SS(r) $ 3.5 CREATING PS:<REMARKS> DIRECTORY The directory PS:<REMARKS> to the operator. <Creating to the operator directory day. the . Step 103: from users operator Give is used to receive messages sent by users this directory avoids constant interruption can the Command Press the RETURN 1issuing read the PLEASE messages "ECREATE a With specified (DIRECTORY NAME) this time PS:<REMARKS> each and Key. Type CTRL/E CREATE, and press the ESC key. Type PS:<REMARKS> and press the RETURN key. CTRLE requests. at The system prints (NAME). @ | Vo ] $"E CREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<REMARKS>(®r1) [NEW] $S mp Step 104: Press completion Upon Press the the of RETURN RETURN the key Key. above and step proceed the to system prints the next step. each time LPTSPL [NEW] and SS. $§ (w1) $ 3.6 If for CREATING the the THE LPFORM.INI LPFORM.INI line 1. file printer, Prints the is the FILE created, system does the name of the user who name of the file that receives a request following: requested the 1line printer. (BANNER) 2. Prints 3. After the If this file received, the all user's is LPTSPL the information name omitted, will use again. each the in that is being file is printed. printed, (HEADER) it prints (TRAILER) time a system request default. for the line printer 1is TAILORING mpStep 105: Give the Command: Press the RETURN The LPFORM.INI file must CONNECT and press the Type PS:<SUBSYS> $CONNECT | and THE CONNECT Key. SYSTEM (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SUBSYS> and Type PS:<SUBSYS>. directory reside in the ESC key. The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). press the (TO DIRECTORY) RETURN key. PS:<SUBSYS>(wi) $ m)Step 106: Give the Command: RETURN CREATE (FILE) LPFORM.INI and Press the Key. Use your system's text editing program to create the LPFORM.INI file. Type default editing program, EDIT.) the uses below example (The Type (FILE). prints system The Kkey. ESC the CREATE and press The system proceeds into Input press the RETURN key. and LPFORM.INI used are The parameters in the example below mode and prints 00100. used your on You must decide the parameters to be explanatory purposes. for only system. (5O SCREATE INPUT: 00100 00200 (FILE) LPFORM.INICw1) LPFOEM.INI.1 2 Crer) NORMAL/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER: (1) NARROVI/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER:2/WIDTH:72 00300 The above example causes the wuser's name and the filename to be on both normal and narrow forms before the actual data twice printed prints system the Also, after all the data is printed, is printed. the wuser's name twice again on both normal and narrow forms. The characters parameter WIDTH:7Z informs the system that a maximum of 72 can be printed I’SHep 107: horizontally on Press the ESC Key. narrow forms. Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. the press To leave edit mode and save the file without line numbers, Type EU and press the system prints the edit prompt. The key. ESC RETURN key. The system prints the filename and the generation number, then the TOPS-20 00300 * EUCReT) command prompt. (s [LPFORM.INI.1] S NOTE Perform the Steps in Chapter 4 next 1if Perform the DECSYSTEM-20. a have you Steps in Chapter 5 next if you have a DECSYSTEM-2020. If your system is going to be part of should perform before going on 5. the ARPA the steps to Chapter network, you in Appendix E 4 or Chapter CHAPTER CREATING THE (For 4 FRONT-END FILE DECSYSTEM-20 SYSTEM Only) The steps in this chapter restore the front-end file system when you reinitialize it or change the front-end hardware. They also restore the front-end software if the front-end file system on disk 1is destroyed. These steps copy front-end file following MOU UFD 4.1 the front-end software space on the public front-end Adds a to the a directory list in of the front-end devices. front-end file space public structure. PIP Copies files RED Changes the definition of the front-end 1logical from the floppy disk to the public structure. SAV Saves INI 1Initializes HALTING l"Step 108: the THE from to mp Step 109: the TOPS-20 Step to the public the structure. name SYO: monitor. front-end file system on PS:. MONITOR 7 in Chapter is mounted in the left drive is mounted in the right drive 2.) (drive (drive 0) 1). Type CTRL/\. vprints PAR> floppy disk on Make Sure the Correct Floppy Disks are Mounted. At the console terminal, Command Parser. When system the front-end Be sure that System Floppy A and that System Floppy B (Refer the the programs: device Creates from the floppy disks to structure. They involve the prompt type CTRL/\ to return vyou are at Command Parser PAR>: to the command front-end level, the CREATING .Step 110: To stop The THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type SHUTDOWN and Press the RETURN Key. the system TOPS-20 prints monitor, a list of type SHUTDOWN and press the RETURN key. messages. (1) PAR> SAUTDOWN * *HALTED* * $DECSYSTEM-20 Error: If you which CTRL/\ THE FRONT-END in must procedure Section mp Step 111: is print an the error message $DECSYSTEM-20 and front-end is printed, after command. give the NOT RUNNING. If it ABORT command. Go back does to MONITOR invalid if you did not stop the TOPS-20 4.1. Set the Switch Register to 000003 switch register to 000003 (Octal). (switches 1 and 0 up, the start the down). »Step 112: Hold SHUTDOWN reissue type 108. entire the can system This rest mistype you not, Step RESTARTING Set RUNNING The 4.2 monitor NOT Hold ENABLE and Press the SWITCH REGISTER Button. ENABLE front-end and press the monitor from drive information. Section 4.3. RSX-20F system The the system VB14-45G 6:11 23-0CT-82 REDIRECTED [DX0: MOUNTED] [DX1: MOUNTED] If REGISTER 0. After [SYO: Error: SWITCH TO you left the starts the KL look like prints button will [DX1l: to print a MOUNTED] few lines proceed of to DXO0:] switch register 1Initialization set to 000007, routine. The the system printout would this: RSX-20F VB14-45G [SYO: REDIRECTED [DX0: MOUNTED] [DX1: MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION KLI -- ENTER 6:11 TO DXO0:] VB12-12 DIALOG 23-0CT-82 RUNNING [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> Set the SWITCH switch register REGISTER buttons correctly again. and press the ENABLE and CREATING THE If you set the FRONT-END switch FILE register SYSTEM incorrectly, system the may print: 11-HALT T04 or **This VOLUME DOES NOT CONTAIN A HARDWARE-BOOTABLE SYSTEM** ENABLE Set the switch register correctly and press the SWITCH REGISTER buttons 4.3 and again. COPYING FILES FROM FLOPPY DISK TO RP04 OR RPO6 Remember that you are Use the following procedures to copy the files. to the front end and that you must wait for a prompt commands typing There is no type-ahead feature except when before typing the answer. want you line or to type a CTRL/\. the press DELETE You can type a CTRL/U to erase an entire to key erase a single character per keystroke. the assume that 8 Many of the steps in this chapter and in Chapter To use a dual-port drive other than disk pack is mounted on drive 0. drive following the make 0, changes: Where a step calls for DBO: 1. the drive actual used. to be typed, type the number For example: Messages printed by the system will reflect DBl:, of DB2:, etc. this change. than drive 0, If the disk is mounted on a drive other Instead, pressing ENABLE and DISK in Step 148 will not work. up set the front-end switch register switches 7 and 0 in the Set switches 10, 9, and 8 to the binary number of position. up; 8 For example, for drive 1, set switch the drive used. for drive 3, set switches 9 set switch 9 up; 2, for drive 2. and 8 up. and M) Step 113: SWITCH After this has been completed, press the ENABLE REGISTER buttons. Type CTRL/\. The system takes To start the front—end Command Parser, type CTRL/\. 1load the Command Parser from the floppy disks. about 10 seconds to You are at Command Parser command level when the system prints the The % after PAR indicates that the central processor is prompt PAR%. not running: [DX1: MOUNTED] CTRL/ PAR% ) Step 114: STOP. The central processor halted (as opposed to the front-end processor) must be in the before you proceed to the next step. is not halted, front-end file the front-end monitor will system in a usable state. If the central processor not be saved When the central processor is stopped, the system prints a percent sign, %, following the Command it prints an angle bracket, >, give the SHUTDOWN If Parser prompt. command and type CTRL/\ before continuing. 4-3 CREATING mp Step 115: To start THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type MCR INI and Press the RETURN Key. the INITIALIZE key. When the (after a seconds), few PARSMCR program, INITIALIZE it type program prints MCR is the INI ready prompt and for press you to Wait 5 the type RETURN commands INI>: INI (i) INI> MpStep 116: Type DBO: Perform To initialize the DBO: and press finishes. next TIt and Press the RETURN Key. the Next Seconds and Step. front-end file system on the public structure, type RETURN key. In about 2 seconds, the INI program the does not reprint the prompt. Proceed directly to the step. INI>DBO: Crer) Error: If you start press back wp Step 117: To start Parser the the at the to wrong device Step 113. front-end HALT Step 1If name or you still switch get and an get error an wait message, error message, one minute. When the Go 112. Type CTRL/\. the 1s front-end ready prompt (cirL type again for Command you to Parser, type type commands CTRL/\. (about 10 seconds), Command it prints PAR%: ) PAR% NOTE Nothing mp Step 118: To start Xey. happens until you type CTRL/\. Type MCR MOU and Press the RETURN Key. the When MOUNT you PARY MCR are program at again, MOUNT type command MCR MOU and level, the system press the prints RETURN MOU>: MOU(rer) MOU> Brror: If .Step 119: To allow a make a Type DBO: the (the one the RETURN prints you front with key. typing MOU end to use its reserved the channel selector set to When the mount operation message -- reissue and MOUNT the command. and Press the RETURN Key. the prompt, MOU> DBO : (rer) MOU> error, COMPLETE MOU>: area on the dual-port disk A/B), type DBO: and press is complete, the system CREATING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM If you mistype DBO:, the mount operation may fail. Error: Otherwise, command. If this reissue the happens and the system reprints the prompt MOU>, go back to Step 117. Type CTRL/Z and CTRL/\. mp Step 120: To terminate the MOUNT program and start the front-end Command Parser, After about 10 seconds, when the followed by CTRL/\. type CTRL/Z, system is at Commznd Parser command level, it prints the prompt PAR%: (CirL2) MOU> "2 PAR% Type MCR UFD and Press the RETURN Key. l’»Step 121: The To run the UFD program, type MCR UFD and press the RETURN Kkey. a After it. starts and disk floppy the from program the loads system few seconds, UFD is ready for you to type commands and prints the prompt UFD>: PAR$MCR UFDCuer) UFD> If you make a typing error, Error: Type DBO:[5,5] l’»Step 122: Perform the Next Press reissue the command. RETURN Key, Wait 10 Seconds and Step. To create the directory (in the front-end reserved space on the public structure) that contains the front-end file system, type DBO:[5,5] and does not you probably did not give the correct command the last time press the RETURN key. reprint next the prompt. When the UFD program finishes, it Wait 10 seconds and then proceed directly to the step: UFD>DBO: [5,5] (e Error: If the system prints: UFD -- FAILED TO CREATE DIRECTORY you ran the MOU program. Error: If the Go back to Step 114. system prints: UFD -- DIRECTORY ALREADY EXISTS CREATING you should on. delete Perform UFD THE -- the FRONT-END all DIRECTORY | PAR¥MCR files steps FILE in SYSTEM the directory before going below: ALREADY EXISTS PIP(wr) PIP>DBO:*.*;*x /DE(xir) Now M) Step 123: To load CTRL/\. the skip to Step 125. Type CTRL/\. the front-end Command After 10 seconds, the system prints the prompt Parser Command from the Parser 1is floppy disk, type at command level and PAR%: NOTE Nothing W)Step 124: happens until you type CTRL/\. Type MCR PIP and Press the RETURN Key. To load the PIP program from the floppy disk and start it, type PIP and press the RETURN key. After 10 seconds, PIP is ready for to type commands. PAR$MCR The system prints the prompt MCR you PIP>: PIP (i) PIP> Error: If l’»Step 125: To copy you make a typing error, reissue the command. Type DBO:/NV=DX0:*.* ,DX1l:*.* and Press the RETURN Key. the newest version of all the files from the {both drive 0 and drive 1) to the front-end file system structure, type DBO:/NV=DXQ:*,* DX1l:*,* and press the {You can use CTRL/U and the DELETE key to help type floppy others in this chapter.) You will hear clicking as the system the floppy disks. After about ten minutes, the transfer is and the system prints the prompt PIP>: * * ,DX1:* *(ker) PIP> DBO:/NV=DX0: PIP> Error: If you make a typing error, reissue the disks on the public RETURN key. this line and command. accesses complete CREATING mpStep 126: THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type DBO:/LI and Press the RETURN Key. To get a list of and press the the files on RETURN key. the front-end file The system prints system, type DBO : /LI the list of the f iles copied from floppies A and B. Check it against the directory 1lis ting shown in the TOPS-20.BWR file to be sure that you have all the £ iles shown there. The TOPS-20.BWR file 1is 1located on the TOPS-20 Installation tape. If you are installing a TOPS-20 system with RP20 is disks, note that the file RSX20F.MAP, which is on System Floppy C, not yet in the front end file system. The directory listing shown here is only a sample. Do not worry about the order of the files, generation numbers, or dates and times when comparing the files. The file sizes (indicated in the second co lumn in 256-word blocks) the system prints should be the same. the prompt PIP>: When the listing is finished, /LT (e PIP>DBO: DIRECTORY DBO:[5,5] 24-NOV-82 16:36 F11ACP.TSK;1 KLDISC.TSK;1 KLRING.TSK;1 KLXFER.TSK;1 TKTN.TSK; 1 MIDNIT.TSK;1 SETSPD.TSK;1 KLE.TSK:;1 KLI.TSK;1 MOU.TSK;1 KLA.MCB; 231 KLX.MCB; 231 BOOT.EXB;1 MTBOOT.EXB;1 KL.CFG;1 BF16N1.A11;1 PARSER.TSK:1 T20ACP.TSK;1 BOO.TSK;1 COP.TSK;1 DMO.TSK;1 INI.TSK;1 PIP.TSK;1 RED.TSK;1 SAV.TSK;1 UFD.TSK; 1 ZAP.TSK;1 RSX20F.SYS;1 TOTAL OF 77. 5. 6. 5 6. 4, 4, 28. 66. 5. 36. 42, 60. 60. 1. 1. 48, 8. 19. 8. 5. 23, 56. 6. 13. 9, 38. 57. 696. BLOCKS C C C C C C C C C C 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-N0OV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 C C C C C C C C C C C C IN 28. 16:30 16:30 16:30 16:30 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:32 16:32 16:32 16:32 16:33 16:33 16:33 16:33 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:36 FILES to As long as a floppy disk is mounted, you can give the /LI command If the PIP program to list the names of the files that it contains. the disks, list you are installing a system that does not have RP20 above includes the file RSX20F.MAP;1, which is 142 blocks long. CREATING ) Step 127: THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type CTRL/Z and CTRL/\. To end PIP followed commands by and and PIP> start the CTRL/\. prints the After front-end 10 seconds, prompt PAR%: typing error, Command Parser, the system is type CTRL/Z ready to accept | TN (CERL ) PAR% Error: If mp Step 128: you make a reissue the command. Type MCR RED and Press the RETURN Key. To load and start the REDIRECT program from floppy disk, type MCR RED and press the RETURN key. After the REDIRECT program is ready to accept commands (about five seccnds), the system prints the REDIRECT prompt RED>: PAREMCR RED(ri1) RED> Error: If I"Step 129: you make a typing Type DB0:=SY0: and Perform the error, reissue the command. and Press the RETURN Key. Next Step. Wait 5 Seconds To redirect the primary front-end file structure from the floppy disks front-end file system on the public structure, type DBO:=SY0: the to and press the RETURN key. After 5 seconds, the REDIRECT program 1is finished and does not reprint the prompt. Proceed directly to the next step. RED>DBO:=5Y0: Cmr) Error: If this Step mp Step 130: fails or you make a mistake and the system PARS%: ) PAR% 111.) Type CTRL/\. To start the the system (CIRL operation has printed the prompt RED>, reissue the command. If it still fails, perform Steps 111 through 113 and 118 through 120, then continue at Step 128. (Even this may not work. You may have to perform all the steps again, beginning with front-end Command Parser, type CTRL/\. After one second, 1loads and starts the Command Parser and prints the prompt CREATING W Step 131: THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type MCR SAV and Press the RETURN Key. To start the SAVE After one second, program, the SAVE system prompt prints PAR$MCR the type MCR SAV and press the RETURN Kkey. program is ready to accept commands and the SAV>: SAV (ki SAV> Error: If »Step 132: Before you make a typing error, reissue the command. to =zero Set the Switch Register to Zero. proceeding, set the switch register (all switches down) . mp Step 133: Type SY0:/WB and Press the RETURN Key. To save the system bootstrap and the front-end monitor 1in the front-end file system on the public structure, type SY0:/WB and press the RETURN key (WB stands for write bootstrap). After the bootstrap and the monitor are saved, the system prints a message and the front end restarts itself at the save entry point: SAV>SYO0: /WB(rer) [DBO: [DX0: DISMOUNTED] DISMOUNTED] [DX1: DISMOUNTED] RSX-20F VB14--45G [SYO: REDIRECTED [DBO: MOUNTED] Error: If you make 6:28 24-NOV-82 TO DBO:] a typing error, The last two messages inform you that on the TOPS-20 file system instead of ‘Step 134: Remove in a the safe reissue the the the command. front end is using floppy disks. the files store them Store the Floppy Disks A and B. floppy disks, insert them in their covers, and place. NOTE If vyou have some spare floppies available, it is a good idea to copy System Floppies A and B to the spare floppies for backup purposes. Refer to the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide for this procedure. CREATING l"Step 134A: FILE SYSTEM Floppy if you C in have the left drive trouble.) (drive 0). (Refer to Step 7 Type CTRL/\ mp Step 134B: prompt FRONT-END Mount System Floppy C on Drive 0 Mount System in Chapter 2 To start second, THE the the front-end Command Parser again, type CTRL/\. system loads and starts the Command Parser and After prints one the PAR%: (¢ lRl } PAR% mp Step 134C: Type MCR MOU and Press the RETURN Key. To start the MOUNT program, type MCR MOU and press the RETURN key. When the system is at MOUNT command level, the system prints the prompt MOU>: PAR$ MCR MOU (rir) MOU> Error: If mp Step 134D: you make a Type DX0: typing error, reissue the command. and Press the RETURN Key. The MOUNT program mounts floppy drive 0, then prints the message MOUNT COMPLETE: MOU> DX0: (Gir) MOU -- mp Step 134E: MOUNT COMPLETE Type CTRL/Z and CTRL/\. To terminate the MOUNT program and start the front-end Command Parser, type CTRL/Z, followed by CTRL/\. After about one second, when the system is at Command Parser command level, it prints the prompt PAR%: MOU>"2Z (iR ) PAR% mp Step 134F: Type MCR PIP and Press the RETURN Key. To run the PIP is at PIP program, command type level, it MCR PIP and press prints the RETURN the prompt PIP>: error, retype the PAR$MCR PIP(®1) PIP> Error: If you make a typing command. Kkey. When CREATING THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM mp Step 134G: Type DBO:/NV=DXO:*.* and Press the RETURN Key. Copy the <contents of DBO:/NV=DX0:*, 6 *, This is copied, PIP prints System Floppy C copies RSX20F.MAP the prompt to the disk by to the disk. When typing the file PIP>: PIP>DBO:/NV=DX0:*,6 *(r1) PIP> mp Step 134H: Type DBO:/LI and Press the RETURN Key. To get a list of the files on the front-end file system, type DBO:/LI and press the RETURN key. The system prints the list of the files copied from floppies A, B, and C. Check it against the directory listing shown in the TOPS20.BWR file to be sure that you have all the files shown there. The TOPS20.BWR file 1is 1located on the TOPS-20 Installation tape. The directory listing shown here is only a sample. Do not worry about the order of the files, generation numbers, or dates and times when comparing the files. The file sizes (indicated in the second column in 256-word blocks) should be the same. When the listing is finished, the system prints the prompt PIP>: /LI (R PIP>DBO: DIRECTORY DBC:[5,5] 24-NOV-82 16:36 F11ACP.TSK;1 TKTN.TSK;1 KLDISC.TSK;1 KLRING.TSK;1 KLXFER.TSK;1 MIDNIT.TSK;1 SETSPD.TSK;1 KLE.TSK;1 KLI.TSK;1 MOU.TSK;1 KLA.MCB; 231 BOOT.EXB;1 MTBOOT.EXB;1 BF16N1.A11;1 PARSER.TSK;1 T20ACP.TSK;1 BOO.TSK;1 COP.TSK;1 DMO.TSK;1 INI.TSK;1 77. 6. 5. 6. 5 C C C C C 4, 4. 28, 66. 5. 36. 60. 60. 1. 48. 8. 19. 8. 5. 23. C C C C C PIP.TSK;1 RED.TSK;1 SAV.TSK;1 UFD.TSK;1 ZAP.TSK;1 RSX20F.SYS;1 RSX20F.MAP;1 56. C 6. C 13. C 9. C 38. C 57. C 142, TOTAL PIP> OF 838, BLOCKS 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 24-NOV-82 16:30 16:31 16:30 16:30 16:30 24-NOV-82 16:31 24-NOV-82 16:31 24-NOV-82 16:31 24-NOV-82 16:31 24-NOV-82 16:32 24-NOV-82 16:32 24-NOV-82 16:32 24-NOV-82 16:33 24-NOV-82 16:33 24-NOV-82 16:33 24-NOV-82 16:34 24-NOV-82 16:34 24-NOV-82 16:34 24-NOV-82 16:34 24-NOV-82 16:34 C C C C C C 24-NOV-82 16:35 24-NOV-82 16:35 24-NOV-82 16:35 24-NOV-82 16:35 24-NOV-82 16:35 24-NOV-82 16:36 24-NOV-82 16:36 IN 28. FILES CREATING mp Step 134I: THE FRONT-END FILE SYSTEM Type CTRL/Z and CTRL/\ To exit command from the parser, command parser PIP program, type a CRTL/Z. To restart type a CTRL/\. When at command level, prints the prompt the the front-end front-end PAR%: PIP>"7Z PAR% mp Step 134J: To at Type MCR DMO and Press the RETURN Key. start the DMO program, type MCR DMO and press the RETURN command level, the DMO program prints the prompt DMO>: key. When PAR% MCR DMO(rer) DMO> Bp Step 134K: Type DX0: and Press the RETURN Key. To dismount the floppy drive, After a few seconds, when prompt type the DX0: drive and press the RETURN key. is dismounted, DMO prints the DMO>: DMO> DX0: (rer) DMO -- DISMOUNT COMPLETE DMO> ) Step 134L: To exit Type a CTRL/Z and CTRL/\ from the When vyou return the prompt PARS%: DMO to program, command type level, a the CTRL/Z followed front-end command D DMO>" 2 PAR% NOTE If is you a have good a spare idea to floppy available, it copy System Floppy C to the spare floppy for backup Refer to the TOPS-20 System Guide for this procedure. purposes. Manager's by a CTRL/\. parser prints CHAPTER CREATING 5 THE MICROPROCESSOR FILE (For DECSYSTEM-2020 Only) The steps in this chapter describe how file system. After completing these SYSTEM to build the microprocessor steps, you may boot the system from disk. mpStep 135: Give the Command: Press the RETURN CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> and Key. You must connect to the directory where the microprocessor initialization ©program 1is located. Type CONNECT and press the ESC key. The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). Type PS:<SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key. $CONNECT $ .Step 136: To (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>(xer) Give the Command: RETURN RUN Key. start the microprocessor (PROGRAM) file system program, The system prints (PROGRAM). ESC key. the RETURN key. The system prints a few lines SMFILE> SMFILE type and Press RUN and the press Type SMFILE and press the of information and the prompt. $SRUN (PROGRAM) SMFILECr) [FOR HELP "HELP"] DECSYSTEM-2020 DIAGNOSTICS FE-FILE PROGRAM VERSION 0.3, TOPS-20, KS10, CPU#=4097 TYPE SMFILE> mp Step 137: Give the Command: PS: <RCOT-DIRECTORY>BOOTSTRAP.BIN and WRITE Press SETUP the RETURN Key. WRITE To inform the system where to write the bootstrap program, type SETUP PS:<ROOT-DIRECTORY>BOOTSTRAP.BIN and press the RETURN key. The system prints the SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE>WRITE SETUP PS:<ROOT-DIRECTORY>BOOTSTRAP.BIN(xer) SMFILE> CREATING I’Ehfp 138: To press MICROPROCESSOR Give the Command: initialize and THE the the pointer RETURN SMFILEDWRITE SYSTEM WRITE RESET and Press the RETURN Key. words key. FILE The in the system home block, prints the type SMFILE> WRITE RESET prompt. RESET(R1) SMFILE> ’Step 139: Give the Command: To have the system read the the RETURN key. The system SMFILE>READ READ KS10.ULD and Press the RETURN Key. microcode, prints the type READ KS10.ULD SMFILE> prompt. and press KS10.ULDCkeT) SMFILE> ‘Step 140: To inform then the and press Give the Command: SERIAL nnnnn. the system of the serial number of the KS10, type SERIAL and serial number of the KS10 (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1), the RETURN key. The system prints the SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE> l"Step 141: To have system, the Give the Command: WRITE CRAM and Press the RETURN Key. the system write the microcode into the microprocessor file type WRITE CRAM and press the RETURN key. The system prints SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE>WRITE CRAM(®r) SMFILE> mp Step 142: Give the Command: RETURN WRITE BOOT SMBOOT.EXE and Press To have the system write the monitor pre-boot program microprocessor file system, type WRITE BOOT SMBOOT.EXE and RETURN key. The system prints the SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE>WRITE the Key. BCOT onto press the the SMBOOT.EXE(za ) SMFILE> I’>Step 143: Give the Command: To inform the file system DONE and system that and ask the WRITE DONE and Press the RETURN Key. you are finished system to update and press the RETURN key. repeats the SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE>WRITE ) DONE(xer [HOME SET] BLOCKS SMFILE> The system building the home the microprocessor blocks, type WRITE prints [HOME BLOCKS SET] CREATING mp Step 144: THE MICROPROCESSOR Give the Command: Press RETURN the OUTPUT FILE CRAM SYSTEM PS:<SYSTEM>KS10.RAM To have the microcode saved on tape when you are <creating backup tape, type OUTPUT CRAM PS:<SYSTEM>KS10.RAM and press key. The system prints the and Key. SMFILE> a system the RETURN prompt. SMFILE>OUTPUT CRAM PS:<SYSTEM>KS10.RAM(R) SMFILE> mp Step 145: Give the Command: PS:<SYSTEM>MTBOOT.RDI and OUTPUT Press MTBOOT the RETURN Key. SMMTBT .EXE To have the magtape bootstrap program saved on tape when you are SMMTBT.EXE MTBOOT OUTPUT type tape, backup system a creating PS:<SYSTEM>MTBOOT.RDI and press the RETURN key. The system prints the SMFILE> prompt. SMFILE>OUTPUT MTBOOT SMMTBT.EXE PS:<SYSTEM>MTBOOT.RDI(®er) SMFILE> ’Step 146: Give the Command: EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. To return to the TOPS-20 command level, type EXIT and press the RETURN key. The system prints the TOPS-20 enabled prompt. SMFILE>EXIT(rEr) $ CHAPTER RESTARTING At this point 1. 2. 3. 4, Loaded THE SYSTEM file system. monitor and have: the TOPS-20 1Initialized TOPS-20 the TOPS-20 the Loaded the files for related programs into and PS:<SUBSYS>. directories PS:<SYSTEM> User Package into directory PS:<UETP.LIB>. Created the system initialization files. and 5. you 6 Environmental Test either Loaded the front-end software for the DECSYSTEM-20 TOPS-20 file 1into the system or 6. file microprocessor the Created system for the DECSYSTEM-2020. TOPS-20 standard the and intact, 1is system Now the TOPS-20 file This means is completely installed on your system. software bundled you can stop the system and reboot it from the file system on disk. central the that sure be Whenever you have to restart the system, otherwise you can damage the file system you stopped; 1is processor just created. and 147 Steps To restart the DECSYSTEM-20, follow the procedures in To restart the DECSYSTEM-2020, follow the 152 through 155. and 148, procedures mp Step 147: in Steps Make 149 Sure DECSYSTEM-20 through the 155. Central Processor Only). has Stopped (for Check your output to be sure that the last time the system printed the prompt PAR (in Step 131), it was followed by a % to indicate that the central processor is stopped. If the prompt is followed by a >, type SHUTDOWN and ) Step 148: press the RETURN key. Hold ENABLE and Press the DISK Button.(for DECSYSTEM-20 only) To restart the system, hold ENABLE and press the DISK button. The system restarts after a few seconds and obtains all the software from the TOPS-20 file system. Continue at 6-1 Step 152. RESTARTING THE SYSTEM If the TOPS-20 file system is on a drive other than drive 0, holding the ENABLE button and pressing the DISK button does not work. You For drive. disk appropriate the to must set the switch register example, if the TOPS-20 file system is on drive 1, set switches 8, 7, and 0 up; for drive 2, set switches 9, 7 and 0. (Refer to Part 4, Chapter 1, of the TOPS-20 Operator's Guide for more information on setting the switch register.) Once you have set the switches to the appropriate disk drive, hold ENABLE and press the SWITCH REGISTER button rather than the DISK button. When you follow this procedure, the system prints the gquestion, KLI -- ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? and waits for a reply. Reply by pressing the RETURN key, then go to Step 152. RSX-20F VB14-45G 6:11 23-0CT-82 [SY0O: REDIRECTED TO DBO:] [DBO: MOUNTED] KLI KLI -- VERSION VB12-12 RUNNING -- KL10 S/N: 2102., 60 HERTZ KLI -- KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION KLI -- KL10 HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT: INTERNAL CHANNELS CACHE ALL CACHES 231 LOADED ENABLED LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION. TYPE CONTROLLER INT SIZE ADDRESS KLI -- KLI -- [PS MOUNTED] 4 CONFIGURATION FILE WRITTEN BOOTSTRAP LOADED AND STARTED System ENTER MA20 4 1024K 00000000 restarting, CURRENT DATE wait... AND TIME: The line "System restarting, wait..." is printed on all the terminals currently connected to the system to inform users that the system will soon be Error: ready to If the use. system prints: *** THIS VOLUME DOES NOT CONTAIN A HARDWARE BOOTABLE SYSTEM *** the disk pack on the dual-port drive does not contain the front-end software. Perhaps the wrong disk pack has been mounted. But if everything appears to be in order, try the error the If again. 4 through 2 Chapters in steps continues, contact DIGITAL Software Support. If the system does nothing when you press the switches, may have pressed ENABLE and SWITCH REGISTER by mistake. pressing ENABLE you Try and DISK. lines the If the system prints JSYS error messages between System restarting, wait..., you probably and MOUNTED] [PS the in information some mistyped have PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and correct any errors. file. Use EDIT to check the file RESTARTING mp Step 149: Type CTRL/\ THE SYSTEM (DECSYSTEM-2020 Only). To get the KS10 command parser, type a CTRL/\. The system may or not print ENABLED before it prints the KS10> prompt. may i ENABLED KS10> l’»Step 150: Type SH and Press the RETURN Key (DECSYSTEM-2020 Only). To shut down the system, type SH and press the RETURN key. prints **HALTED**, and a message similar to the one below. The system KS10>sH(x1) KS10>USR MOD * *HALTED* * $HLTD/000001 PC/000000,,010610 NOTE If your public structure is on a drive other than disk drive 0, pressing the BCOT button (Step 151) will not work. You must give the DS command and specify the unit where your public structure 1is mounted. The following example shows how to select disk drive 2. KS10>Ds(x1) >>UBA? 1 (ReD) >>RHBASE? 776700 (rer) >>UNIT? 2(Rer) KS10>BT(rer) BOOT> (rer) #p Step 151: Press the BOOT Button To restart the system, control panel. The all the obtains BT press the BOOT button on the DECSYSTEM-2020 system restarts after a few seconds and obtains software from the all the software, TOPS-20 it prints file system. After the system ENTER CURRENT DATE AND TIME. SW [PS MOUNTED] ENTER CURRENT I"Step 152: After (DECSYSTEM-2020 Only). the DATE AND TIME: Type the Date and Time and Press the RETURN Key. prompt, type day-month-year the hhmm date and time in the form: RESTARTING Then press the RETURN ENTER CURRENT SYSTEM key: DATE AND TIME: YOU HAVE ENTERED WEDNESDAY, IS THIS CORRECT (Y,N) »Step 153: THE 24-0CT-79 1112(rer) 24-0CT-79 11:12AM, Type Y or N and Press the RETURN Key. After the system prints the date and time, check to be sure that it is If the date or it is, type Y and press the RETURN key. If correct. time is incorrect, type N, press the RETURN key, and go back to the last step: YOU HAVE IS WHY THIS 24-0CT-79 ENTERED WEDNESDAY, CORRECT 11:12AM, (Y,N) Y i) RELOAD? W) Step 154: Type TS and Press the RETURN Key. If you plan to install the unbundled software, type TS and When you bring up the system for any other Kkey. RETURN one of the abbreviations listed in Table 6-1, below: press reason, the type WHY RELOAD? TS(xer) <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED RUN CHECKD? Table 6-1 System Reload Abbreviations Meaning Abbreviation SA TS PM CM CR B Step 155: Type N Stand-alone Timesharing Preventive maintenance Corrective maintenance Crash (include a reason) and Press the RETURN Key. any reports The CHECKD program examines the entire disk file system, do not have to run this You them. correct to tries and errors, other program unless the system crashes unexpectedly, or if, for some If you halt the that there may be disk errors. suspect you reason, other some using by or command CEASE CTRL/E system by giving a controlled means, you do not have to run CHECKD before restarting. Type N and If do you press run the RETURN key. The it takes about CHECKD, system prints RUNNING DDMP. four minutes per disk drive. Be wait until the system prints something on your prepared for a 1long For each inconsistency, CHECKD prints a message and console terminal. (Refer to the TOPS-20 error occurred. which the the directory 1in Operator's Guide for a list of CHECKD error messages.) RESTARTING RUN CHECKD? THE SYSTEM N(w1) RUNNING DDMP SYSJOB 4 (10) STARTED RUN SYS:0ORION RUN SYS:QUASAR AT 24-0CT-79 1112 * k% kxk 24-0CT-79 11:12:09 - TGHA V2 IS RUNNING FOR THE FIRST TIME. * ok ok Kk RUN SYS:MOUNTR RUN SYS:INFO RUN SYS:MATILER RUN SYS:MAPPER RUN SYS:LPTSPL RUN SYS:CDRIVE RUN SYS:SPRINT JOB 0 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA "ESET LOGIN PSEUDO "ESET LOGIN CONSOLE "ESET OPERATOR PTYCON GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO JOB 1 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA RUN / SYS:BATCON SJ 0: QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR SJ 1: @QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR SJ O: JOB SJ O0: QENA SJ SJ SJ 0: 0: 0: S$"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO S"ESET LOGIN CONSOLE S"ESET OPERATOR SJ SJ 0: 1l: SPTYCON JOB 2 ON TTY207 SJ 1: Q@ENA 1 ON TTY206 SJ 0: PTYCON> GET SJ 0: PTYCON> SILENCE SJ 1l: SRUN 24-0CT-79 11:12:22 11:12:23 SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO SYS:BATCON [From OPERATOR on SJ 24-0CT-79 line 0: PTYCON.LOG.1 0: 0: 0: PTYCON> OPR(O0) PTYCON> 0: [CONNECTED W 210: SYSTEM IN OPERATION] ALL 3 CONN TO OPERATOR OPR SUBJOB OPR(0)] OPR TI :0: CHAPTER 7 INSTALLING THE TOPS-20 DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATE TAPES in The steps this section describe how distribution tape or any TOPS-20 update tape. to install the TOPS-20 To install any unbundled software products follow the steps 1in the guide that accompanies each unbundled installation appropriate software product. The TOPS-20 distribution tape contains five savesets. These savesets documentation regarding specific programs; system files that are: SUBSYS files that allow you to rebuild the directory PS:<SYSTEM>; sources that allow allows vyou to rebuild the directory PS:<SUBSYS>; you to rebuild certain programs, if required; language sources that allow you to rebuild certain language modules, such as MACRO, LINK; GALAXY sources that allow you to rebuild a GALAXY system, if required. If you are installing the TOPS-20 DECnet-20 V2 unbundled software on a DECSYSTEM-2040/2059, follow the steps 1in Chapters 9 and 10 of the TOPS-20 DECnet-20 Programmer's Guide and Operations Manual. If you are installing the TOPS-20 DECnet-20 V2.1 unbundled software on a DECSYSTEM-2020, follow the steps in Chapter 10 of the TOPS-20 DECnet-20 Programmer's Guide and Operations Manual. If you are 1installing the IBM communications unbundled software, follow the steps in Chapter 3 of the IBM Emulation/Termination Manual. NOTE manual this in steps remaining The assume that you are using the operator's in previous console terminal (CTY), as to possible 1is it Although steps. another at perform the remaining steps then return to the vyou must terminal, CTY after completing Chapter 8 to resume control mp Step 156: of the system. Type CTRL/C. Type CTRL/C to start a job at your terminal: | Installation-test System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4.1(5443) @ INSTALLING l’»Step 157: To look HEADER current PTYCON. THE TOPS-20 DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATE TAPES Type SYSTAT OPERATOR and Press the RETURN Key. at the operator jobs on the system, type SYSTAT OPERATOR and press the RETURN key. The system prints a list of the operator Jjobs. Determine which operator Jjob 1S running Use that job number 1n the next step. @SYSTAT OPERATOR Job Line 0 1 HEADER(=x1) Program User det sysjob operator 206 ptycon operator 2 207 batcon operator 3 210 opr operator B Step 158: Give the Command: ATTACH (USER) OPERATOR (JOB#) 1. Attach the operator job running PTYCON. Type ATTACH and press the ESC key. The system prints (USER). Type OPERATOR and press the ESC key. The system prints (JOB #). Type 1 and press the RETURN Kkey. The system prints a message similar to [PSEUDO-TERMINAL, CONFIRM]. Press the RETURN key. @ATTACH (USER) OPERATOR [PSEUDO-TERMINAL, (JOB #) CONFIRM] 1(xer) (i) PASSWORD: I"Step 159: Type the system Type Your Password and Press the RETURN Key Twice. operator's prints the PASSWORD: password prompt vyour for and press the OPR the RETURN Key twice. The and Press program. password OPR> mpStep 160: To find software /ALL and tape a Give the Command: the RETURN tape drive that you tape, give the OPR press the RETURN key. drives and theilr SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALL Key. status. can use for mounting the unbundled program command, SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE The system responds with a 1list of INSTALLING OPR> SHOW THE STATUS TOPS-20 DISTRIBUTION AND TAPE-DRIVE UPDATE TAPES /ALL OPR> 9:35:49 DRIVE MTAQO: --Tape Drive STATE VOLID MTA2: MTA3: DEK 31 45 Write: Yes, Unlabeled Write: Yes, Unlabeled LARRUP Unloaded Yes Unloaded AVR: MTAS5: Yes In Use AVR: Yes, Loaded AVR: Yes, AVR: MTA4: USER Unloaded AVR: MTAl: Status—REQ# JOB# No Unloaded AVR: Yes OPR> NOTE If tape drive to Step 163 allocation has not been vyour site, the state of all at enabled Skip Unavailable. tape drives will be B Step 161: in Give the Command: this case. SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: UNAVAILABLE. a To mount the TOPS-20 Unbundled Software tape, you should first make The OPR program command, free drive unavailable to timesharing users. The example uses UNAVAILABLE accomplishes this. SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: but you can specify any drive that is not 1n use at 0, number drive the moment. UNAVAILABLECki) OPR> SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: Fnter text and terminate with "2 m) Step 162: Enter INSTALLING UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE and Type CTRL/Z. text and Enter terminate with " Z | INSTALLING UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE “Z OPR> B Step 163: Give the PUSH Command and Press the RETURN Key. TOPS-20 at be first To use the unbundled software tape, you should Giving the PUSH command to the OPR program puts you at command level. TOPS-20 command level. OPR> PUSH(rer) TOPS-20 Command processor @ 5.1(1354) INSTALLING THE TOPS-20 DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATE TAPES NOTE If you are using the console terminal, as recommended above, your PUSH command to OPR puts you at TOPS-20 command level with enabled capabilities. You will then see the TOPS-20 enabled prompt ($) instead of the standard prompt (@). In this case perform Step 164, then skip Step 165 and continue with Step 166. l’»Step 164: Give the Command: ASSIGN (DEVICE) MTAO:. Give the ASSIGN command to assign a magnetic tape drive to your job. The example uses drive number 0, but you can use any free drive of your choice. Type ASSIGN and press the ESC key. (DEVICE). Type MTAO: and press the RETURN key. @ when the drive is assigned: The system prints TMThe system prints an Crs) @ASSIGN | (DEVICE) MTAQ:(rer) @ Error: If the device ERROR: the message: ?ALREADY Use the find an »Step 165: is assigned to another ASSIGNED JOB a Give the Command: $ To start prints prints n ENABLE (CAPABILITIES). files to restricted areas, you must Type ENABLE and press the ESC key. The Press the RETURN key. The system prompt: @ENABLE S mp Step 166: the system command INFORMATION (ABOUT) AVAILABLE DEVICES ¢to available tape drive. Reissue the ASSIGN command. Because you will be restoring enable your capabilities. system prints (CAPABILITIES). prints TO job, (CAPABILITIE< S) Type DUMPER and Press the RETURN Key. DUMPER, the DUMPER type DUMPER and press the RETURN key. prompt: SDUMPER (rer) DUMPER> DUMPER ERRORS If you get errors using DUMPER, refer to the description of DUMPER in the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide. The system INSTALLING mp Step 167: TOPS-20 Give the Command: Tell DUMPER you have Type TAPE MTAQ0: THE which tape assigned and and DUMPER>TAPE drive the the | TAPE to another press press DISTRIBUTION AND (DEVICE) use. drive in TAPES MTAOQ:. The example Step 164, ESC key. The system RETURN key. The system (DEVICE) UPDATE uses use MTAO:, that prints but drive (DEVICE). prints the if number. Type DUMPER prompt: MTAQ: (rer) DUMPER> l’»Step 168: Mount Mount the Distribution Tape or the Update Tape. the distribution assigned to your mounting the tape. B Step 169: To or update Remember to tape on the press the ON drive that LINE button press the is after Type REWIND and Press the RETURN Key. start key. tape job. the The tape system at the moves beginning, the tape to type the REWIND and beginning and prints RETURN the DUMPER prompt: DUMPER>REWIND (Rer) DUMPER> B Step 170: Give the Command: RESTORE (TAPE FILES) PS:<OPERATOR>. To restore press the ESC press and you the -documents the ESC key. the time The The system RETURN key. that the a 1list want RESTORE key. command. PS:<OPERATOR> is prints PS:<OPERATOR> <*>* *_ * system made, the You not type RESTORE and Type PS:. Press was of (TO) to directory PS:<OPERATOR>, system prints (TAPE FILES). The tape PS:<>*.*.%* a followed files, <can (TO). prints by give restore the the the Type header containing DUMPER FILES files to date before the prompt. command any and the If directory. required. GO DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER LOADING END OF TAPE # (TAPE 1, FILE(S) FILES) PS:<*>* * * <DOCUMENTS>, INTO (TO) WEDNESDAY, PS:<OPERATOR> (rer) 8-AUG-79 1741 PS:<OPERATOR> SAVESET DUMPER> Error: If ERROR: PS:<OPERATOR>, no Rewind and tape you do the not tape mounted problems and see try that persist, Representative. the files message, are again. the contact LOADING being Be tape your FILE(S) INTO from tape. restored sure drive you 1is DIGITAL have on the correct 1line. Field If Service INSTALLING THE TOPS-20 DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATE TAPES You can list any of the files on the line printer by typing giving the PRINT command. The files with file types .MEM, .5D, .DOC, .TCO, and .PCO are the most useful to print. CTRL/C and .BWR, .BD, Return to DUMPER by RETURN twice. 1In giving the the CONTINUE example, the user command prints and the pressing file the key SOURCE.DIR: (G DUMPER>"C SOURCE.DIR(rer) (FILES) SPRINT SCONTINUE Crer ) (rer) DUMPER> mp Step 171: Give the Command: RESTORE (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>* % % (TO) PS:<SUBSYS>. To restore the binary files to PS:<SUBSYS>, type RESTORE ESC key. The system prints (TAPE FILES). Type PS:. key. The system prints <*>*_*_* (TQ), Type PS:<SUBSYS> and press Press the the ESC and the RETURN by key. The system prints the header, followed press the DUMPER prompt: DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER TAPE LOADING END OF # | 5O (TAPE 1, FILE(S) FILES) <BINARY>, INTO PS:<*>* * _* WEDNESDAY, (TQO) PS:<SUBSYS> (rer) 8-AUG-79 1743 PS:<SUBSYS> SAVESET DUMPER> mp Step 172: If you GALAXY replace sources Sources. want to restore sources, <SUBSYS> stored. give the the source same with the name of Normally, the system logical name SYS: use the CTRL/E CREATE files RESTORE for either command as the directory directories in in the the 1language last or step, but where you want the definition of the the do not contain source files, so you command to create a directory for the should source files. .Step 173: Remove the I’Ehep 174: Go back to Dismount the Tape and Store It. tape from the drive and store it in a safe place. Go to Step 168 to Restore Other Software Products. Step 168 if you want to install other unbundled software products. B Step 175: Type EXIT command Give the DUMPER Command: and press level: ) DUMPER>EXIT $ the RETURN key EXIT. to end DUMPER. Return to TOPS-20 INSTALLING mp Step 176: THE TOPS-20 Give the Command: DISTRIBUTION AND UPDATE DEASSIGN (DEVICE) TAPES MTAO:. by use for tape magnetic Give the DEASSIGN command to release the The system prints Type DEASSIGN and press the ESC key. users. other (DEVICE). Type MTAO: (or the number of the magnetic tape drive that The system prints the key. RETURN the press and using) are you TOPS-20 prompt: SDEASSIGN | (DEVICE) MTAO: $ mp Step 177: Proceed to Step 181 in Chapter 8. RUNNING THE This chapter describes This program performs a This program starts number repeatedly, while the User the The temporary a how to CHAPTER 8 TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE run User Environment cursory source data of the check of the tests that files are kept files and results Test Package. system. <can run either once or in the directory <UETP.LIB>, of the directory <UETP.RUN>. For more information Environment Test Package Reference Manual. test on are UETP, stored refer to 1in the NOTE If of you performed the steps in Chapter 7 this manual, you may skip Steps 178 through should 180 and start at Step 181. You perform all the steps in this chapter on the operator's console terminal (CTY). Otherwise, you must return to the CTY after completing this chapter to resume control of the system. »Step 178: Type a Type CTRL/C. CTRL/C to start | Installation-test a job. System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4.1(5443) @ W Step 179: From Give the Command: Password this (ACCOUNT) LOGIN (USER) OPERATOR and OPERATOR Press (PASSWORD) the RETURN Key. terminal, log into the system as OPERATOR, using account OPERATOR. Type LOGIN and press the ESC (USER). Type OPERATOR and press the ESC key. password and the The system prints system The prints system (s @LOGIN JOB @ (PASSWORD). prints 6 | (ACCOUNT). Type Type your password OPERATOR and and ) 1SC (USER) ON press press TTYl OPERATOR 8-SEP-79 (PASSWORD) 13:51 your password the the ESC RETURN Your your key. The key. key. ) (ACCOUNT) OPERATOR(re) RUNNING mp Step 180: THE TOPS-20 Give the Command: RETURN ENABLE PACKAGE (CAPABILITIES) and Press the key. The Key. To enable your capabilities, system prints UETP (CAPABILITIES). type ENABLE and press the ESC Press the RETURN key. @ ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) (xe) $ l.'Step 181: Give the SET-UP.CMD Command: and Press TAKE the (COMMANDS RETURN Key. FROM) PS:<UETP.LIB> Kkey. ESC the press To set up various subdirectories, type TAKE and Type PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD and prints (COMMANDS FROM). system The press the RETURN key. This command file contains all the commands necessary to create the subdirectories. s ) | $ TAKE (COMMANDS FROM) PS:<UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD(xer) [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] [NEW] END OF mpSTEP 182: <UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD.3 Give the Command: Press the RETURN CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<UETP.RUN> and Key. CONNECT To connect to the directory that has the standard tests, type Type prints (TO DIRECTORY). system The key. ESC the press and PS:<UETP.RUN> and press the RETURN key. (s $ CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<UETP.RUN>(rer) $ l.'Step 183: Give the Command: RETURN RUN (PROGRAM) UETP.EXE and To start the UETP program, type RUN and press the ESC key. Type UETP.EXE and press the RETURN key. prints (PROGRAM). prints the prompt Press The system The system UETP>. Crs0) $ RUN (PROGRAM) UETP.EXE(Rer) USER ENVIRONMENT TEST PACKAGE | [ 1-Nov~-79 9:41:45 UETP> the Key. RUNNING mp Step 184: THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE Load the Standard Verification Tests. Type: VERIFY.CMD(rer) TAKE (COMMANDS FROM) This command causes (VERIFY) to the begin. The standard following tests UETP>ENABLE VERIFY/CYCLE:1l loaded and are typed the out: first test ! Verify that the correct software ! is COMPLETED] ENABLE [hh:mm:ss to be messages UETP>BEGIN BEGIN COMPLETED] [hh:mm:ss installed UETP>DEFAULT/CYCLE:00:15 DEFAULT COMPLETED] [hh:mm:ss UETP>ENABLE RANCBL ENABLE COMPLETED] [hh:mm:ss ! Random I/0 COBOL test UETP>ENABLE RANFOR ! Random I/O FORTRAN test ! Random test [hh:mm:ss The ENABLE UETP>ENABLE MTAQ [hh:mm:ss ENABLE field COMPLETED] hh:mm:ss contains Following for MTAO COMPLETED] these messages, the the time the message was generated. system prints the following status information: [ 1-Nov-79 Test 9:42:47] Depth Status Cyvcle name VERIFY RANCBL RANFOR MTAO The VER VER VER VER next Queued Enabled Enabled Enabled two messages START VERIFY END Error Error Start run count limit time 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0:15 0:15 0:15 you see 0 0 0 0 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss are 9:43:33 VERIFY The messages Times 10:14:53 signify the beginning and ending of the test. NOTE If any messages appear between the start message and the end message, there are errors in the files you received. Do not proceed any further. If the first test (VERIFY) finishes without error, go on to Step 185. RUNNING THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE NOTE In the tape following steps you should use a not presently drive that is vyou If available to timesharing users. have just completed the steps in Chapter may to in 7 of this manual, vyou TOPS-20 ASSIGN command drive that Otherwise, in Chapter 185 Ba sure drive is gave up Step the the 176. perform Steps 160 through 164 7 before continuing with Step below. Mount a Magnetic Tape on the Drive You Want to Test. mp Step 185: Test MTAO you give assign requires that that a write on a blank magnetic tape be mounted ring has been inserted line before you issue on drive in the tape and the BEGIN command. 0. that the NOTE The standard tests include a random I/O COBOL test, a random I/O FORTRAN test, and a magtape test for MTAO:. If vyou want to test a tape drive other than the test for drive 0, you must enable the selected drive. Type ENABLE and press the (TEST) . ESC key. MTAn Type the drive, e.g., the key. RETURN The (n MTAl, = system prints the number of MTA2) and press ESC UETP>ENABLE ’Step 186: | (TEST) MTAn(xer) Begin the Remaining Tests. Type: BEGIN(Rrer ) The system prints the following messages: START RANCBL hh:mm:ss START RANFOR hh:mm:ss START MTAQ hh:mm:ss END RANCBL hh:mm:ss END RANFOR hh:mm:ss END MTAOQ hh:mm:ss If messages other the messages have than those failed. shown above appear, the tests generating RUNNING When all tests are THE TOPS-20 completed, UETP the PACKAGE following status information appears: [All [ tests complete on processor 1-Nov-79 10 :26:01)] Depth Status Cycle VERIFY VER RANCBL VER RANFOR VER Ended Encled Ended MTAQ VER Ended Test # 2102] Times run Error count Error limit 1 0:15 0:15 1 1 1 0 0 0:15 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 either type name Start time 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 9:42:33 10:15:46 10:15:46 10:15:46 NOTE can point you this At an EXIT command to terminate UETP, or begin The software. the tests for unbundled (Step 187) shows how to step following terminate UETP. 187 B Step 187: and proceed Type EXIT(mD) UETP>EXIT vyou If you software, unbundled to want should test to skip Step Step 188. . (rer ) $ 8.1 The TESTING steps software software in If you this products have If You ENABLE UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 UETP> sure Be you have Have enable tests for unbundled installed. BASIC and BASIC-PLUS-2, (TEST). to to enable tests only for the unbundled Installed (TEST) installed system prints SOFTWARE section describe how products. mp Step 188: The UNBUNDLED BASIC-PLUS-2, Press (TEST) BASIC(Rer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] Give the Command: RETURN Key. the ESC ENABLE and press and press the RETURN key. type Type BASIC the key. RUNNING |}Step 189: If The you have system THE TOPS-20 UETP If You Have Installed ALGOL, (TEST) the ALGOL installed prints and Press ALGOL-20, (TEST). Type PACKAGE Give RETURN type ENABLE ALGOL and the Command: ENABLE Key. and press press the the RETURN ESC key. key. Crs) | UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 (TEST) ALGOL(rer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP> I}E%ep 190: If You Have Installed DBMS-20, Give (TEST) If you system have DBMS installed prints and Press DBMS-20, (TEST). Type the type DBMS RETURN the Command: ENABLE and press press the RETURN Give the and ENABLE Key. the ESC key. The key. ESC (TEST) DBMS(Rrir) UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP> *Step 191: 1If You Have Installed APL-20, (TEST) If you system have APL installed prints and Press APL-20, (TEST). Type the type APL and RETURN Command: ENABLE Key. ENABLE and press press the RETURN the ESC key. The key. FSC ( &) (TEST)APL UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP> I"Step 191A: If you have Installed FORTRAN, Give (TEST) FORTRA and Press the RETURN the Command: ENABLE Command: ENABLE Key. D (TEST) UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 [ENABLE FORTRA(wr) COMPLETED] UETP> ’Step 191B: If you have Installed COBOL-68, Give the (TEST) ( esc UETP> and Press ) (TEST) COBOL(Crer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 COBOL the RETURN Key. RUNNING THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE l’»Step 191C: If you have Installed COBOL-74, Give the (TEST) CBL74 and Press the RETURN Key. Command: ENABLE Command: ENABLE ! (TEST) CBL74(rer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP> ENABLE 10:43:07 UETP> l’»Step 191D: If you have Installed SORT-20, Give (TEST) SORT UETP>ENABLE (TEST) and Press the RETURN the Key. SORT(xen) [ENABLE COMPLETED] 10:43:07 UETP> mpStep 192: Give the Command: BEGIN and Press the RETURN Key. To begin the standard tests and all the unbundled software tests you The system prints (UETP and press the ESC key. BEGIN type enabled, RUN AFTER). Press the RETURN key. The system starts all the tests immediately. UETP>BEGIN(Crer) 10:45:17 [BEGIN COMPLETED] UETP> NOTE Periodically give a STATUS command to find out which tests are running and how The run. been have they many times example of the STATUS an 1is following command: UETP>STATUS (R 11:02:05] [1-Nov-79 Test Depth Status Cycle VERIFY RANCBL RANFOR MTAQ VER VER VER VER Ended Running Queued Queued 1 0:15 0:15 0:15 name Times Error Error 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 run count 1limit Start time 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 1-Nov-79 10:42:20 10:59:27 10:59:27 10:59:27 UETP> From the above example you can see that the RANCBL.SUP test 1s and MTAO0.SUP tests are in a wait state, and RANFOR.SUP the running, the VERIFY.SUP test has ended. If under sure to the heading ERROR COUNT there is a number other than 0, print the ERRORS.LOG file, when the tests are completed, find what out caused the error. be to RUNNING The UETP To find program out does when THE not all TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE notify you when tests are completed, the When all the tests are completed, resembles the following: your all the output tests give from are completed. a STATUS command. the STATUS command STATUS (Rrer) [ 1-Nov-79 11:40:45] Test name Depth Status VERIFY VER Ended RANCBL VER Ended RANFOR VER Ended MTAOQ VER Ended l"Step 193: To The exit Cycle Times run Error count Error limit 1 1 0 0 1-Nov-79 10:42:20 0:15 1 0 0 1-Nov-79 10:59:27 0:15 1 0 0 1-Nov-79 10:59:27 0:15 1 0 0 1-Nov-79 10:59:27 Give the Command: from the EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. UETP program, type the TOPS-20 enabled system prints Start time EXIT and press the tests still RETURN key. prompt. "X T T(rir) UETP> $ Error: If ERROR: system you prints try "ABORT ALL" completed mp Step 194: Give to and the exit the delete the there $%$YOU BEFORE then EXITING. reissue Command: CLEAN-UP.CMD To while message temporary and TAKE Press 1t has the directories, The system prints (COMMANDS FROM). press the RETURN key. The system directory the are STILL Wait EXIT HAVE until type FROM) FROM) TAKE and press <UETP.TLIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD(rei) [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] End of tests are PS:<UETP.LIB> the ESC key. Type PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and prints the word [OLD] for each deleted. (COMMANDS the Key. ) (s STAKE all the RUNNING. command. (COMMANDS RETURN running, TESTS <UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD.3 RUNNING THE TOPS-20 UETP PACKAGE NOTE If you did not perform the Chapter 7 before proceeding to in this chapter, you cannot steps 1in the steps return ¢to the OPR program (Step 195). Instead, perform Steps 158 and 159 in Chapter 7 at this time. Then you may skip Step 195 and continue with Step 196, below. W) Step 195: Type POP. To return the CTY to the OPR program, OPR type POP. The system prints the prompt. $ POP(re) OPR> .Step 196: Press the Give the command: RETURN SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAOQ: AVAILABLE and Key. available of pool the to using To return the tape drive you were AVAILABLE and press the RETURN SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: type resources, Key. OPR>SET OPR> TAPE-DRIVE MTAQ: AVAILABLE(r:) APPENDIX UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO A TOPS-20 This appendix describes how to install DECSYSTEM-20 now running TOPS-20 Release As you update system's The the replies updating system, @re procedures e INSTALLING THE e REVERTING TO e enter printed the in RELEASE MAKING THE RELEASE 4 4.1 4.1 SOFTWARE Release 4.1 4 software. software commands printed into sections. black. are divided RELEASE RELEASE four SOFTWARE (Section 1n on red. a The They are: (Section A.1l) A.2) 4.1 MONITOR THE PRIMARY MONITOR (Section MONITOR THE PERMANENT MONITOR (Section A.3) e MAKING THE RELEASE 4.1 A.4) A.1 To INSTALLING install the THE RELEASE TOPS-20 Release e System Floppy A e System Floppy B e System Floppy C, only. If you version, DO NOT ® TOPS-20 e A separate 4.1 4.1 software, which should be used are wupdating your USE Installation tape SOFTWARE Floppy you need: for new 1installations software from a previous C. Tape V4.1 for each unbundled software product you have purchased. ’Step l: Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. (s { QLOGIN (USER) s OPERATOR (PASSWORD) s password (ACCOUNT) ] account(ra) UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE If you the to are using CTY, vyou PTYCON job. 1instead The you at enabled Step 2 the can PTYCON give of logging PUSH command TOPS-20 command capabilities, and 1s an to PTYCON then example at skip of so to giving the program the CTY to at PUSH command in another PTYCON puts level with you can perform Step 4. Below command the and PUSH performing Step 2: PTYCON>PUSH(rer) TOPS-20 Command processor 5.1(1354) SINFORMATION‘ (AROUT) DISK-USAGE(ker) n pages n Working assigned n Pages pages, free on n Permanent pages allowed PS: $ Continue W) Step 2: the have RETURN must you can type INFORMATION type DISK-USAGE enough disk of pages system To and press and | space find the to (ABOUT) on out press assigned 4. INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE Key. proceed. @ INFORMATION The Step Give the Command: You number at your how ESCAPE the you public many free key. RETURN and the structure pages The key. number The of pages assigned Working pages, n Pages free on n DISK-USAGE( 1) Permanent pages allowed PS: @ Where n = the number of pages NOTE The number of free pages on PS: must prints be at least 5000. If you do not have at least this number of pages free, vyou must dump some files to tape. pages Press before are system free prints n n (PS:) there system and on PS:, (ABOUT); prints on the PS:. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE ) Step 3: Give the Command: ENABLE 4.1 SOFTWARE (CAPABILITIES). CEsc ) @ ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) m) Step 4: Give the Command: the RETURN (G TAKE PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD Key. To delete various directories created by the UETP program, PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and S TAKE $ Press press the type TAKE RETURN key. PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD (R Give the Command: W) Step 5: and - and Press the “ECREATE NAME) (DIRECTORY PS:<UETP.LIB> RETURN Key. must you PS:, Before you can load the Release 4.1 UETP program onto Type CTRL/E CREATE and the Release 4 PS:<UETP.LIB> directory. delete Type NAME). (DIRECTORY prints system The key. ESC the press The system prints (PASSWORD). the ESC key. press and PS:<UETP.LIB> Press the RETURN GF!D key. C%E) (f&) CREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) .’Eflfp 6: Give the Command: PS:<UETP.LIB> (PASSWORD) (Ga) KILL and Press the RETURN Key. To delete the Relsase 4 PS:<UETP.LIB> directory, the RETURN key. The system prints type KILL and press [CONFIRM]. SSKILLCrer) [CONFIRM] l’»Step 7: Press the RETURN Key Twice. To confirm you are deleting RETURN key twice. [CONFIRM] §$ Crer) (ai) the directory PS:<UETP.LIB>, press the UPDATING I}Step 8: THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 Kill Directories PS:<UETP.RUN> RELEASE and 4.1 SOFTWARE PS:<UETP> in the Same Manner. _____ $"ECRIATE PS:<UETP.RUN> (w1) [OLD] [CONFIRM] (wiil (oLo] SSK I, (k1) [CONFIRM] xir ) (et S I"Step 9: Give the Command: DELETE PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE .QUASAR and After allowing any owners asking them spooling file in Press preparation system. Type key. system prints verifying the SODELETE RETURN pending jobs to re-submit (GALAXY) The the to run or sending messages them later, you must delete for DELETE Key. the Release 4.2 batch PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY- MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR.]l and and to the and press gives their master spooling the ESCAPE a message deletion. | PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR" PS :<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR [OK] $ I’SHep 10: Mount the Installation Tape on MTAO: and Give the Following Commands: COESC $REWTND SSKIF Bp Step 11: O} (DEVICE) (DEVICE) MTAO: (i) TMMTAQ: 2 FILESCwr) Give the Command: RUN (PROGRAM) MTAO: and Press the RETURN Key. To run ESCAPE the DLUSER key. RETURN key. DLUSER prompt. $ XUUN program The After (PROGRAM) DLUSER> system the from magnetic prints DLUSER MTAQ:(re1) tape, (PROGRAM). program starts, type RUN Type MTAO: and the system press and press prints the the the UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE skip two tape, the rewind If you make a typing mistake, The following example files, and reissue the command above. shows how to do this when the Installation tape is on MTAO:. Error: (i (DEVICE) SREWIND MTAO: (ki) (50 $SKIP (DEVICE) SRUN (PROGRAM) MTAO: 2 FILESCr1) MTAO: (ki) DLUSER> W) Step 12: Give the DLUSER Command: the RETURN LOAD (FROM FILE) MTAO: and Press Key. To load the directory structure into the file system from the TOPS-20 The system and press the ESCAPE key. LOAD type tape, Installation a After key. and press the RETURN Type MTAO: prints (FROM FILE). few seconds, the system prints DONE. and gives the DLUSER prompt. ESC DLUSER>LOAD The (FROM FILE) MTAO: (krer) system prints DONE. DLUSER> B Step 13: Type EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. Type EXIT and press the RETURN key to leave the DLUSER system prints the TOPS-20 enabled prompt. program. The DLUSER>EXIT (Crir) $ W) Step 14: Give the Command: RUN (PROGRAM) MTAO: and Press the RETURN Key. To run the DUMPER program, type RUN and press the ESCAPE key. and press the RETURN key. Type MTAO: system prints (PROGRAM). the DUMPER program starts, the system prints ESC The $RUN (PROGRAM) system prints DUMPER> MTAQ:(rer) the DUMPER prompt. The After UPDATING Error: If THE you and how DECSYSTEM-20 receive any TO TOPS-20 errors, RELEASE rewind the reilssue the command above. The to do this for MTAQ:. If errors DIGITAL Software 4.1 SOFTWARE tape, skip four files following example shows still persist, contact Support. (50 SREWIND (DEVICE) MTAO:(ri1) GO SSKIP‘(DEVICE) MTAO: 4 FILES(w1) O The SRUN (PROGRAM) system prints MTAQ:(rir) DUMPER> mp Step 15: Give the DUMPER Command: the To tell and press the RETURN DUMPER program which press the ESC the RETURN DUMPER>TAPE The system key. key. | TAPE (FILESPEC) MTAO: and Press type TAPE Key. The The tape system drive prints system prints (FILESPEC) you are using, (FILESPEC). the Type MTAO: and DUMPER prompt. MTAO: (1) prints DUMPER> »Step 16: Give the Command: PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM> To copy the TOPS-20 Installation ESC key. to Press monitor your and public FILES) RETURN 1its related structure, PS:<*>* *_ * (TO) Key. type programs RESTORE and from the press the system prints (TAPE FILES). Type PS: and press the ESC system prints <*>* * * (TO). Type PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM> and press The the RETURN key. DUMPER command directory restores PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>. system prints the message all DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER LOADING OF DUMPER> TAPE #1, FILE(S) SAVESET the When END OF Cesc) END (TAPE the The key. This tape RESTORE and files all SAVESET in the the first files and the PS:<*>*.*.,* (TO) FOR 4.1", are DUMPER saveset to the restored, the prompt. Cesc (TAPE FILES) "NEW-SYSTEM INTO RELEASE PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> (re1) THURSDAY, 2-AUG-82 2103 UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE CAUTION The saveset coritains the files. These the in print the following have Just restored TOPS20.BWR and TOPS20.DOC files describe changes 1in software made this manual. continuing To you contents of with the too late Read these your for inclusion files before installation. TOPS20.BWR and TOPS20.DOC perform the 1level, type steps: mp Step 16A: Type CTRL/C and Press the RETURN Key. To ex1t CTRL/C from and the DUMPER press the program RETURN and to return to command Key. (CTRL/C) DUMPER> R —_— C RET ) ) Step 16B: Give the TYPE Command: Press To print the the the RETURN contents ESCAPE PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR the entire STYPE of the Key. contents (FILE) and of the TYPE(FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR and Key. TOPS-20 system press the BEWARE To print the file, prints RETURN Key. type TY PE (FILE). The Press the contents (FILE) press Type will print PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR(w1) of RETURN the TYPE (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC Key. TOPS-20 DOCUMENTATION file, press the ESCAPE Key. The system prints PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC and press the RETURN Key. The the entire contents of the DOCUMENTATION FILE. STYPE system and file. I’EHTP 16C: Give the TYPE Command: and BEWARE The type TY PE (FILE), system will and TYPE print PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC(rer) STOP Plecase read these files entirety before continuing in their with your installation. W) Step 16D: Type CONTINUE and Press the RETURN Key. To return to the DUMPER program to proceed with your 1installation, type CONTINUE and press the RETURN Key twice. The system returns the DUMPER prompt. SCONTINUE (rer)Gar) DUMPER> UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE RESTORE Give the Command: mp Step 17: PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> and Press (TAPE (TO) PS:<*>*.*.* FILES) the RETURN Key. PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>. directory the to Restore the system program files The system prints (TAPE FILES). and press the ESC key. RESTORE Type (TO). <*>* *,* prints system The and press the ESC key. Type PS: When all the files are Type PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> and press the RETURN key. DUMPER restored, the system prints the message END OF SAVESET and the prompt. DUMPER>RESTORE (TAPE FILES) DUMPER TAPE #1, "NEW-SUBSYS FOR RELEASE 4.1, THURSDAY, END OF (S) FILE LOADING pPS:<*>* .* .* (TO) PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>( wi1) 2-AUG-82 2106 INTO PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> SAVESET DUMPER> #p Step 18: RESTORE (TAPE Give the DUMPER Command: (TO) FILES) PS:<UETP.LIB>*.*.,* and Press the RETURN Key. PS:z<¥>* *.* type Environment Test Package, the User To restore the files for Type FILES). (TAPE prints system The key. ESC the press and RESTORE Type (TO) . % * <*>* The system prints and press the ESC key. PS: Press *.*.*., prints system The key. ESC the press and B> PS:<UETP.LI the system prints When all the files are restored, the RETURN key. END OF SAVESET and the DUMPER prompt. DUMPERS>RESTORE | >*. ) *, *(x: PS:<UETP.LIB (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>*.% (TO) DUMPER TAPE #1, FILE(S) LOADING END OF ) D) (s "UETP FOR RELEASE 4.1", THURSDAY, INTO 2-AUG-82 2136 PS:<UETP.LIB> SAVESET DUMPER> I’Step 19: Give the DUMPER Command: To terminate the DUMPER program and level, type EXIT and press the EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. RETURN return to the TOPS-20 MTAO: and command key. DUMPER>EXTIT(xi1) $ B Step 20: Give the Command: RETURN UNLOAD (DEVICE) Press the Key. To rewind and unload the tape on MTAO:, type UNLOAD and press the ESC and press the RETURN Type MTAO: The system prints (DEVICE). key. key. SUNLOAD $ | (DEVICE) MTAQ: (rer) UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 A.l.1 Renaming the Release 4 Monitor In case you ever need to revert to the Release copylng before it rename SOFTWARE the Release 4 monitor, 4.1 must you into monitor <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE. FILE) (EXISTING RENAME PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE and Press Command: the Give PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (TO) W Step 21: the RETURN Key. the press and To rename and save the Release 4 monitor, type RENAME Type FILE). (EXISTING prints system The key. ESC (TO system prints The PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and press the ESC key. When the Type PS:<SYSTEM)4-MONITR.EXE and press the RETURN key. BE). message a prints system the completed, successfully 1is rename that the specifying file was renamed correctly. Cesc) (Esc ) SRENAME (EXISTING FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (TO BE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE(r) <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.l => PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE.l [OK] $ Give the mp Step 22: (TO) Command: (FROM) COPY PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and Press To copy the Release 4.1 monitor The key. ESC the the RETURN Key. into PS:<SYSTEM>, type COPY and (FROM) . prints system press Type (Montyp designates PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE and press the ESC key. you have selected for your system, for example of monitor type the refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.1 of this manual for MONMED, or MONSML; for your system.) The system monitor a choosing about information key. RETURN the press Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and prints (TO). copy is successfully completed, the system prints a message the When that specifying the file was copied correctly. s $COPY (FROM) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE(®1) <NEW-SYSTEM>rontyp.EXE. => <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.1l [OK] S A.1.2 Creating <NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD the File You must create the file <NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD to declare system parameters. mp Step 23: Give the (OUTPUT RETURN Command: AS) EDIT (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and Press the Key. 1in To edit PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD and to have the changes placed The type EDIT and press the ESC key. PS: <NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD, ESC Type PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD and press the system prints (FILE). The system prints the generation number of that file and (OUTPUT key. key. RETURN the press Type PS:<NEW-SYSTEM»>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and AS). The system prints: EDIT: <SYSTEM>4~-CONFIG.CMD and the EDIT prompt. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Cesc) The s) $EDIT (FILE) system prints (OUTPUT AS) PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 <SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 EDIT: * Give the Edit Command: mp Step 24: P":* and Press the RETURN Key. To print the contents of PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD, type P :* and then the EDIT A.1.3 prompt. <SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 EDIT: *P press The system prints the entire 4-CONFIG.CMD file and key. RETURN the ~ Changing System Parameters System), Read Chapter 3 of this manual (Tailoring the the system parameters that are necessary. to changes any make and Two parameters that must be added are the definitions for the logical names SYS: Add the following commands to the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. SYSTEM:. DEFINE SYS: DEFINE SYSTEM: and PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>,PS:<SUBSYS> PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, PS:<SYSTEM: NOTE When you are making a change to existing 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, use the of lines the EDIT command to made changes R Any number. 1line the system parameters made be will <NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. wi1ill <{SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD only The remailn in file the same. »Step 25: Press the ESC Key, Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. parameters, system the to After you make all the necessary changes This command key, type EU, and press the RETURN key. ESC the press name The system prints the ends the EDIT program and saves the file. of the output file. *EU (Crer) [<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1] UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE vyou 4.1, Release under system Before bringing up the check the Release 4.1 PTYCON.ATO file against the should compare to have You do not Release 4 PTYCON.ATO file. 1if you have not changed the Release 4 file. files these However, if you have made your own changes to the Release vyou wish those changes to exist and file PTYCON.ATO 4 the to changes the add must vyou under Release 4.1, A.1.4 Setting PTYCON.ATO. 4.1 Release a User Group for the Operator group You must be certain that the operator is a member of user Do so by giving l"Step 26: Give the Command: and 100. the following command. Press the “ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<OPERATOR> RETURN Key. system prints The key. ESC the press and CREATE CTRL/E Type The Type PS:<OPERATOR> and press the RETURN key. (DIRECTORY NAME). system prints QL)) [01d}, then the subcommand prompt. ) $"ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) P¢:<OPERATOR>(ki) [01d] $$ l”Step 27: Type USER 100 and Press the Return Key. At the subcommand prompt type USER, press the 100. Press SSUSER the RETURN space bar, then type key. 100 (xrer) $S l)'Step 27A: Give the Subcommand: IPCF and Press the RETURN Key. To execute all privileged IPCF functions, press the RETURN type the subcommand IPCF and Key. $$ i PCF( w1 B Step 28: Press the RETURN Key. To exit from the subcommand $$hi) $ level, press the RETURN key. UPDATING BStep 29: THE Give the Command: Date To bring The The the system and Time system system RETURN DECSYSTEM-20 down, prints prints’ and TO TOPS-20 4.1 SOFTWARE “ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) +1 Press type the RETURN CTRL/E (TIMESHARING (RESUMING RELEASE CEASE AT). AT). Type and Type the (RESUMING AT) Key. press the +1 and press date and time ESC the and key. ESC key. press the key. SAéCEASEi(TIMESHARING AT) +1 (RESUMING AT) date and time (k1) System shutdown System going down System down, up Shutdown scheduled for 2-SEP-82 1n one minute!! again at 2-SEP-82 13:47:00, 13:48:00 complete NOTE Wait for the system to print Shutdown complete. mp Step 30: At the Type CTRL/\. console Command system terminal, Parser. prints When the Shutdown type vyou prompt CTRL/\ are at to return Command to Parser the command front-end level, the PAR>. complete G ) PAR> B Step 31: Type SHUTDOWN and Press the RETURN Key. To stop the TOPS-20 The system prints a monitor, type SHUTDOWN list of messages. and press the RETURN key. PAR>5HUTDOWN **x HALTED ** $DECSYSTEM-20 B Step 32: RUNNING Type CTRL/\. Type CTRL/\ system 1s the NOT prompt to not PAR> return to the running now, 1nstead, go front-end Command Parser. Because will see the prompt PAR%. If you you back to Step the see 30. e L ikt ) | PAR% B Step 33: To load RETURN The Type MCR PIP and Press the RETURN Key. the PIP key. system PAR PIP> program After prints MCR the PIP(rer) 1 and start second, prompt it, PIP PIP>: is type MCR ready for PIP you and to type press the commands. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Type KL.CFG;*/DE and Press the RETURN Key. mp) Step 34: from your file You must delete any existing front-end configuration front-end file system before bringing up the Release 4.1 front-end monitor. PIP>KL.CFG;*/DE(R1) PIP> NOTE SUCH PIP -- NO prints system the If a have not did you then FILE(S), your 1n file configuration front-end file front-end Step system. Type CTRL/Z and CTRL/\. ) Step 35: To end PIP and return to the front-end followed with Proceed 35. Command Parser, type CTRL/Z in Floppy Drive 0 by CTRL/\. PIP> PAR% and l"Step 36: Mount Release 4.1 System Floppy A l.»Step 37: Set the Switch Register to 000007 (Switches 0, 1, and 2 Up), Release 4.1 System Floppy B in Floppy Drive 1. and Press the ENABLE and SWITCH-REGISTER Buttons Simultaneously. To bring up the Release 4.1 front-end monitor, press SWITCH-REGISTER buttons simultaneously. the The system prints: ENABLE and RSX-20F VB14--45G 6:11 23-0CT-82 REDIRECTED TO DXO0:] [SYO: MOUNTED] [DX0: [DX1: KLI MOUNTED] -- VERSION VB12-12 RUNNING KL1 -- ENTER DIALOG ([NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI> »Step 38: Type NO and Press the RETURN Key. To tell the front end monitor that you want it to take default answers to dialog questions, type NO and press the RETURN key. prints messages as the system is reloaded, and the gives the BOOT> prompt. The front end bootstrap program UPDATING KLI -- THE DECSYSTEM-20 ENTER DIALOG TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT]? KLI>NO(Crer) KLI KLI —-- MICROCODE % NO FILE -- LOGICAL MEMORY VERSION 231 LOADED - ALL MEMORY BEING CONFIGURATION. ADDRESS SIZE INT TYPE 00000000 128K 4 MA20 0 00400000 768K 4 MF20 11 NO CONFIGURED KLTI -- % KLI -- CONFIGURATION FILE - KLI —-- BOOTSTRAP CONTROLLER LOADING FILE LOADED & 1 BOOTSTRAP ALTERED AND STARTED BOOT> mp Step 39: Press the RETURN Key. To tell the bootstrap program to restart the system, press key. The system prints [PS MOUNTED] and System walit... before prompting for the date and time. the RETURN restarting, BOOT> (#t1) [PS MOUNTED] System ENTER mp Step 40: After CURRENT DATE wait... AND TIME: Type the Date and Time, Then Press the RETURN Key. the hhmm. restarting, prompt, Then press type the the RETURN date and ENTER CURRENT DATE AND TIME: The system YOU If you HAVE will ask key. for IS THIS The format day-month-year 24-0CT-82 1112(re) ENTERED WEDNESDAY, 11:12aM, IS THIS (Y,N) entered the correct Otherwise, the date CORRECT system prints WHY the Type Y or N and Press the RETURN Key. have RETURN in prints CORRECT M) Step 41: time key. RELOAD? and (Y,N) date type N time again. Y(wi) and and time, press the Y and RETURN type key. press The the system UPDATING THE W) Step 42: WHY The DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 4.1 SOFTWARE Type TS and Press the RETURN Key. RELOAD? system TS G prints <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT RUN RELEASE FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED CHECKD? NOTE The system prints the message SYSTEM ACCOUNTS TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED because the ACTGEN program has not been run. (Refer to Chapter 6 of the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide B Step 43: for more information.) Type N and Press the RETURN Key. The CHECKD program examines the entire disk file system, reports any You do not have to run the tries to correct the errors. and errors, program unless the system crashes unexpectedly or you suspect that there may be disk errors. Type N and press the RETURN key. The task background The DDMP program is a system runs the DDMP program. that moves pages from the disk RUN CHECKD? swapping area to the disk file system. N RUNNING DDMP SYSJOB 4 (10) STARTED AT RUN SYS:ORION RUN SYS:QUASAR 24-0CT-82 1112 * k k kX 24-0CT-82 11:12:09 - TGHA V2 IS * %k kK RUN RUN SYS:MOUNTR SYS:INFO RUN SYS:MATLER RUN SYS:MAPPER RUN SYS:LPTSPL RUN SYS:CDRIVE RUN SYS:SPRINT JOB O /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA "ESET LOGIN PSEUDO "ESET LOGIN CONSOLE "ESET OPERATOR PTYCON GET / JOB SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO 1 /LOG OPERATOR ENA RUN / SYS:BATCON XX OPERATOR RUNNING FOR THE FIRST TIME. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE O0: sJ 10/24-INSTALLATION-TEST SYSTEM, TOPS-20 MONITOR 4.1(5443) SJ 0: sJ 1: SJ SJ 0: 1: QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR SJ 0: Q@ENA SJ SJ SJ 0: 0: 0: S$"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO S$"ESET LOGIN CONSOLE S$"ESET OPERATOR SJ 0: SPTYCON SJ 1: @ENA SJ 0: PTYCON> SJ SJ 0: 1: PTYCON> SILENCE SRUN SYS:BATCON 10/24-INSTALLATION-TEST SYSTEM, TOPS-20 MONITOR 4.1 (5443) 1: SJ JOB 1 ON TTY206 0: SJ JOB 2 ON TTY207 1: SJ 24-0CT-82 24-0CT-82 [From OPERATOR on line 210: 0: PTYCON.LOG.1 SJ O0: PTYCON> W SJ 0: PTYCON> CONN OPR SJ 0: 0: OPR(0) A.1.5 11:12:23 GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO SJ SJ 11:12:22 SYSTEM IN OPERATION] ALL OPERATOR 3 OPR TI 0:0:1 [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR (0)] Running the CNVDSK Program feature with TOPS-20, If you did not use the TOPS-20 Tape Archiving but are planning on using the Tape Archiving feature with Version 4, the TOPS-20, Version 4.1, you must run the CHVDSK program to enlarge 4.1 Version opened. not is that file each of block descriptor file files have already been formatted for the Tape Archiving feature. Type a CTRL/C and Log In as OPERATOR. l’»Step 44: RGO Installation-test System, OCPERATOR @LOGIN (USER) Job 1 on TTY205 l"Step 45: (PASSWORD) iwinuwaridd 2-SEP-82 11:05:50 ENABLE Your Capabilities. @ENABLZ (CAPABILITIES) ‘i $ l’~Step 46: Run the CNVDSK Program. Crs $k TOPS-20 Monitor 4.1(5443) (PROGRAM) OQutput errors i’ ' XE CNVDSK.E to file: (ACCOUNT) SR TR Rl UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Type the Name of Any m) Step 47: New File. (ERRORS.LOG Only is an Example.) ERRORS.LOG(w1) Output errors to file: Convert files: *, Then The System Prints DSK:<*>*,* Press the ESCAPE Key. List of a System Prints The the RETURN Key. Press l’»Step 48: Directories. Convert * * *(rir) DSK*:<*> files: PS: <ROOT-DIRECTORY> PS : <ACCOUNTS> Use the l’»Step 49: Specified COPY Command in Step 47. to Print the Log File That You The CNVDSK program produces a log file containing a list of files It will fail to convert and/or directories it was unable to convert. a file if the file is open when you run CNVDSK, or if the directory in which the file resides was more than three-quarters full (a directory Use the COPY can contain a maximum of approximately 300 files). command to print the log file on PLTPO:, or give the TYPE command to print the log file on the console terminal. the COPY The example below uses command. (rsc) Cesc ) | SCOPY (FROM) ERRORS.LOG (TO) PLPTO: Crr) ERRORS.LOG => PLPTO:ERRORS [OK] $ »Step 50: Examine the Line Printer Listing of ERRORS.LOG. Examine the listing of the error file produced by the CNVDSK program software, follow Normally several files of type it was unable to convert. files for 1is expected This .EXE from directory PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> will be shown. the system during started were that programs represent they because Other files from system directories start-up procedures of Step 43. You should save this listing. may also be shown for similar reasons. The TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide gives instructions for converting any files shown by the listing. A.2 REVERTING TO RELEASE 4 If you must revert to running the TOPS-20 Release 4 the steps in this section. UPDATING M) Step 1: THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. () @L.OGIN QL (USER) OPERATOR () (PASSWORD) yrcessword (ACCOUNT) sccounti k) @ I’»Step 2: Give the Command: ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) and Press the RETURN Key. To perform the next step ENABLE and press the Press the RETURN key. you ESC must key. enable vyour capabilities. Type The system prints (CAPABILITIES). (rsc ) @KNABLE w1 ) (CAPABILITIES) $ l"Step 3: Give the Command: RENAME PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE Press In Section the RETURN A.l.1, this press monitor the you back ESC renamed system you a the are and system press number and (TO BE). key. When the rename prints (EXISTING FILES) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE Release reverting to 4 message prints the ESC Type (EXISTING key. monitor Release PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE. The PGS :<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE generation the RETURN If 1nto key. BE) The 4, (EXISTING RENAME system that the file has ©S:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE (TO PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (rit) <SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE.1=> <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE [OK] NOTE Before reverting to Release the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD 4, examine file. Be sure 1t contains a definition of logical name SYSTEM:, and that this definition does not include the directory, PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>. 1If 1t does include the directory, PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, when you revert to Release 4 the Release 4 monitor will attempt to operate programs that do not function properly 1in a Release 4 system. If the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD contain a SYSTEM:, into the definition 1insert the file does not of 1logical name following command file: DEFINE to must and Type prints the Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and press has been successfully executed, the specifying FILE) you FILE). been correctly. SRENAME and Key. PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE. put (TO SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM> BE) renamed UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE ‘Step 3A: Give the Command: DELETE PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR the RETURN and Press Key. To delete the master spooling press the ESCAPE KEY. The and gives a message verifying file type DELETE PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARYand system prints MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR.1 the deletion. ESC ¢ SDELETE PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR.1 PS :<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE~-FILE.QUASAR.1 [OK] $ l’»Step 4: Give the Command: Date and Time and “ECEASE Press the (TIMESHARING AT) RETURN Key. +1 (RESUMING AT) To bring the system down, type CTRL/E CEASE and press the ESC Kkey. The system prints (TIMESHARING AT). Type +1 and press the ESC key. The system prints (RESUMING AT). Type the date and time you want timesharing to start again and press the RETURN key. The system prints a list of messages; the last message is Shutdown complete. (Crsc) e @ 1 _ $"E CEASE (TIMESHARING AT) System shutdown System going System down, Shutdown scheduled down in one up again at +1 (RESUMING AT) for 2-SEP-82 minute!! 2-SEP-82 date and time(ker) 13:47:00, 13:48:00 complete. NOTE Wait for the system to print shutdown complete. W Step 5: Type CTRL/\. At the console terminal, Command Parser. When prints system the prompt front-end the to return to CTRL/\ type vyou are at Command Parser command level, the PAR>. | PAR> I’»Step 6: Type SHUTDOWN and Press the RETURN Key. To stop the TOPS-20 monitor, The system prints a list of type SHUTDOWN and press the messages. PAR> SHUTDOWN (&v) *% HALTED ** $DECSYSTEM-20 NOT RUNNING RETURN key. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 I’»Step 7: TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Reload the Release 4 Monitor Using the Release 4 Flopples the Release 4 Disk. or To reload the Release 4 monitor using the Release 4 floppies, mount System Floppy A in floppy drive 0, press the ENABLE and FLOPPY buttons simultaneously, and answer the usual start-up questions. To reload ENABLE the and Release DISK 4 buttons monitor using the Release simultaneously, and 4 answer disk, the press usual the start-up questions. NOTE You can reload the Release 4 monitor from disk only if the Release 4 front-end software 1s still on the disk. A.3 In it MAKING case in THE you Step RELEASE 4.1 MONITOR are presently using 4, below, before the THE PRIMARY Release copying 4 MONITOR monitor, you must rename the Release 4.1 monitor into <SYSTEM>MONITR. EXE. mp Step 1: Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. @LOGIN (USER) OPERATOR | (PASSWORD) password | (ACCOUNT) account(krer) @ M) Step 2: Give the Command: ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) and Press the RETURN Key. To perform the next ENABLE and press Press the RETURN few steps you must enable your capabilities. Type the ESC Kkey. The system prints (CAPABILITIES). key. jpm— i @ENABLE ESC | (CAPABILITIES)Gui) $ ‘Step 3: STOP. Proceed with Step 4 if you have reverted to a Release 4 system, and your present monitor 1is a Release 4 monitor. You must rename this monitor in Step 4 in case you ever need to revert to Release 4 again. You Skip to Step 6 if your present monitor is a Release 4.1 monitor. do not need to rename your present monitor in Step 4. This action was already performed in Section A.l1.1, Step 21. UPDATING QStep 4: THE DECSYSTEM-20 Give the TO Command : PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE To Press the and save rename ESC key. RETURN the The Type BE) 4 (EXISTING type prints press the ESC the system correctly. RENAME (EXISTING and (EXISTING FILE) and key. The system the Release the Type prints 4 (TO monitor 1s that the PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE (TO) prints a message specifying Continue with Step 5. Cis ! FILE) press FILE). When () SRENAME SOFTWARE PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE monitor, PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE. successfully renamed, file has been renamed 4.1 Key. Release and RELEASE RENAME (TO system PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE BE) . TOPS-20 PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (TO BE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE(rir) <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.1 M) Step 5: Give the Command: PS:<SYSTEM> => <SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE.1l COPY (FROM) MONITR.EXE and Press the RETURN [OK] Key. To copy the Release 4.1 monitor into PS:<SYSTEM>, type the ESC key. The system prints (FROM). Type COPY and press PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM> montyp.EXE and press the ESC key. (Montyp designates the type of monitor you have selected for your system.) The system prints (TO). Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and press the RETURN key. When the copy 1is successfully completed, the system prints a message specifying that the file was SCOPY copied (FROM) correctly. PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE <NEW-SYSTEM>montyp.EXE. M)Step 6: Give the Command: (RESUMING AT) Date => (TO) “ECEASE (TIMESHARING and PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE(Rtr) <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.1 Time and Press the AT) [OK] Date RETURN and key. Time Shut down the system by typing CTRL/E CEASE and pressing the ESC key. The system prints (TIMESHARING AT). Type the date and time you want timesharing to cease and press the ESC Kkey. The system prints (RESUMING AT). Type the date and time you want timesharing to start again and press the RETURN key. Cumy e Ces) $"ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) date time(rr) l’»Step 7: and and time | (RESUMING AT) Put the Release 4.1 Front-End Software no Disk. Start at Step 108 front-end date software in Chapter on disk. 4 of this manual to put the Release 4.1 UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE When the Release is put on disk, 1s destroyed. A.4 front-end Release 4 order to Release 4 must use the Release 4 RELEASE 4.1 MONITOR THE MAKING THE The steps 1n this comfortable with the I’Efiep l: 4.1 the In front-end software software front end wuse the again, you floppies. PERMANENT section should be Release 4.1 software. MONITOR performed when you feel Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. Casc) | @LOGIN Cesc) | (USER) OPERATOR s (PASSWORD) password (ACCOUNT) account( ke @ l"Step 2: Give the Command: ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) and Press the RETURN Key. To perform the next ENABLE and press Press the RETURN step ycu the ESC must Kkey. enable your capabilities. Type The system prints (CAPABILITIES). key. \ s @ENABLE $ mp Step 3: Give (1)) (CAPABILITIES) the Command: PS:<SYSTEM>*.,* and COPY Press the (FROM) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.* RETURN Key. (TO) To copy the directory <KNEW-SYSTEM> to <SYSTEM>, type COPY and press the ESC key. The system prints (FROM). Type PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.* and press the ESC key. The system prints (TO). Type PS:<SYS and press the ESC key. The system prints TEM>*.*, Press the RETURN key. The system prints a message specifying that each file has been correctly. Cis) SCOPY (FROM) C%;) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.* (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>*.* () copied UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE mpsStep 4: Give the PS:<SUBSYS> Command: and Press COPY the PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.* (FROM) (TO) RETURN Key. To copy the directory <KNEW-SUBSYS> to <SUBSYS>, type COPY and press Type PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.* and The system prints (FROM). key. ESC the press and PS:<SUB Type The system prints (TO). press the ESC key. The Press the RETURN key. The system prints SYS>*.*., key. ESC the file has been copied system prints a message specifying that each correctly. (s (esc) PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.* (FROM) $COPY (TO) 1) PS:<SUBSYS>*.* Give the Command: CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> and mp Step 5: Press the RETURN Key. Connect to the directory PS:<SYSTEM> by typing CONNECT and pressing Type PS:<SYSTEM> and The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). the ESC key. RETURN the press key. SCONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>(xer) $ l’»Step 6: Give the Command: Press the EDIT (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and RETURN Key. To edit the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, type EDIT and press the ESC key. The Type PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the (FILE). system prints RETURN key. ) (ks { SEDIT (FILE) The system EDIT: PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD(r1) prints: 4-1-CONFIG.CMD * Bp Step 7: Give the EDIT Command: P":* and Press the RETURN Key. To print the entire 4-1-CONFIG.CMD RETURN key. file, type P":* and press the UPDATING I"Step 8: THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO Give the EDIT Command: TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 R line number and SOFTWARE Press the RETURN Key. The parameter DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM>. DEFINE SYS: SYS: To PS:<SUBSYS> system prints example below, the the PS:<SUBSYS> this, type do is 1line located; number parameter 1s must an R then you replaced by DEFINE line number where the press entered located be and at in line the the RETURN R key. command. The In the 00500. *R500 (rer Tre system prints 00500 M) Step 9: Type DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM> and Press the RETURN Key. To define SYSTEM: as PS:<SYSTEM>, press the RETURN key. Also, type DEFINE be sure to command another The to delete any 00500 DEFINE SYSTEM: system prints 1 LINES line (00500/1) giving SYSTEM: use the definition PS:<SYSTEM> and EDIT program's D of SYSTEM:. PS:<SYSTEM>(Crer) DELETED * I"Step 10: To end Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. the EDIT RETURN key. TOPS-20 command program The and system save the prints file, type EU and press the and the <SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD.2 prompt. *EUGiD) <SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD.?2 $ I’Efiep 11: Connect the Give the Command: back RETURN to your key. SCONNECT Cre1) $ log-in CONNECT and Press the RETURN Key. directory by typing CONNECT and pressing UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*_.* and To delete the files in the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, type DELETE and m) Step 12: DELETE (FILES) Give the Command: Press fthe RETURN Key. Type (FILES). prints system The key. ESC the press an prints system The key. RETURN the press and _.* YSTEM>*,* PS:<NEW-S [OK] message for each file ( SDELETE m) Step 13: it deletes. I-S(D | (FILES) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.,* * (k1) Give the Command: Press DELETE (FILES) PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.*.* and the RETURN Key. To delete the files in the directory PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>, type DELETE and Type (FILES) . prints system The key. ESC the press an prints system The key. RETURN the press and * PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>*.*. [OK] message for each file SDELETE mp Step 14: (FILES) it deletes. PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>* * * Give the Command: RET “ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) +1 (RESUMING AT) Date and Time and Press the RETURN Key. Shut down the system by typing CTRL/E CEASE and press the ESCAPE key. key. The system prints (TIMESHARING AT). Type +1 and press the ESCAPE want you time and date the Type AT). G (RESUMIN prints system The timesharing to start again and press the RETURN key. The system prints a list of messages. The last message is Shutdown complete. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 S"ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) date time(rer) and +1 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE (RESUMING AT) System shutdown scheduled for 2-SEP-82 13:47:00, System going down in one minute!! System down, up again at 2-SEP-82 13:48:00 Shutdown complete NOTE Wait for the complete. B Step 15: At the system to print shutdown Type CTRL/\. console terminal, Command Parser. system prints the Shutdown type CTRL/\ When you are prompt PAR>. at to return Command Parser to the command front-end level, the complete ((mf ) { PAR> B Step 16: Type SHUTDOWN and Press the RETURN Key. To stop the TOPS-20 monitor, type SHUTDOWN The system prints a list of messages. and press the RETURN key. PAR>SHUTDOWN(&ir) HALTED ** ** $DECSYSTEM-20 l"Step 17: To run buttons (Refer NOT RUNNING Press the ENABLE and DISK Buttons Simultaneously. the Release 4.1 software from simultaneously and answer to Section A.1.4, Step 38, of disk, press the ENABLE the usual start-up this appendix.) NOTE If you ever need to revert to Release 4, you must reinstall Release 4, using the Release 4 floppies and tapes. and DISK questions. UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-20 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE If you are software, at l"Step 18: this 1installing perform the any steps in unbundled Chapter 7 time. Perform the Steps in Chapter 8 of This Manual. APPENDIX UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 B TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE 4.1 1install Release This appendix describes how to DECSYSTEM-2020 now running TOPS-20 Release 4 software. software To update the system to Release 4.1, enter ‘the commands RED. The system's replies are printed in BLACK. on a 1in printed The updating procedures are divided into three sections._ They are: e INSTALLINGS THE RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE e REVERTING TO RELEASE e 4 (Section B.1l) (Section B.2) MAKING THE RELEASE 4.1 MONITOR THE PERMANENT MONITOR (Section B.3) NOTE The Release 4 SMFILE must not be used if the microcode for an rewrite ever you The pack. disk 4.1 ‘existing Release Release 4 SMFILE (Version 0.2 of SMFILE) writes the microprocessor file system to areas of disk, in such a non-contiquous to Release way that it is not accessible The routines. bootstrap 4.1 the use appendix instructions in this Release 4.1 SMFILE only, which functions Release properly for both Release4 and ’ 4.1 B.l1 To systems. INSTALLING THE RELEASE ' 4.1 SOFTWARE install the TOPS-20 Release 4.1 software, you need: ® ® TOPS-20 Installation tape V4.1 A separate tape for each unbundled softwaré product purchased. vyou have UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE mpStep 1: Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. ESC @LOGIN #)Step 2: (USER) OPERATOR ESC ) (PASSWORD) password (ACCOUNT) account(re) (CAPABILITIES) and Press the RETURN Give the Command; ENABLE Key. To enable your capabilities, type ENABLE and press the ESC RETURN key., the Press (CAPABILITIES). system prints ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) @)Step 2A: Give the Command: the prompt. enabled the TOPS-20 prints The key. The system RETURN INFORMATION (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE Press and Key. You must have enough disk space on your public structure (PS:) before To find out how many free pages there are on PS:, proceed. can you The system prints (ABOUT); type INFORMATION and press the ESCAPE Key. The system prints the the RETURN Key. and press type DISK-USAGE number of pages assigned to you and the number of free pages on PS:. (e @INFORMATION The (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE(rer) system prints n pages assigned n pages free n working pages, where n = on number n Permanent pages allowed PS: of pages NOTE PS: the on pages free If you do not least 5000. have at least this number of pages free, you must dump some files to tape. The number of at be must m) Step 2B: Give the Command: the RETURN TAKE PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and Press program type TAKE Key. To delete various directories created by the UETP PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD and press the RETURN Key. STAKE $ PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD(Rer) UPDATING QStep 3: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 Give the Command: - and Press Before you can delete the load TO TOPS-20 “ECREATE ESC Key. the Release (DIRECTORY Then 4.1 RELEASE Press the RETURN NAME) UETP program onto press the ESC key. The system prints PS:<UETP.LIB> and press the ESC key. The SOFTWARE PS:<UETP.LIB> the RETURN Key. the Release 4 PS:<UETP.LIB> directory. Press 4.1 PS:, you must Type CTRL/E CREATE and (DIRECTORY NAME). Type system prints (PASSWORD). key. $"ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) [OLD] PS:<UETP.LIB> (PASSWORD) (rer) $$ .Step 4: Give the Command: KILL and Press the RETURN Key. To delete the Release 4 PS:<UETP.LIB> directory, the RETURN key. The system prints [CONFIRM]. type KILL and press $SKILL (Rer) [CONFIRM] .Step 5: Press the RETURN Key Twice. To confirm you are deleting RETURN - key twice. the directory PS:<UETP.LIB> press the [CONFIRM] (rer) $$GE) $ mp Step 6: Give the Command: SYSTEM and Press INFORMATION (ABOUT) the RETURN Key. LOGICAL-NAMES (OF) You must be sure that your system-wide definition of 1logical name SYSTEM: does not include the directory PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>. Type INFORMATION and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints, (ABOUT). Type LOGICAL-NAMES and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints, (OF). Type SYSTEM and press the RETURN key. The system prints a 1list of system-wide logical names and their definitions. SINFORMATION (ABOUT) mp Step 7: LOGICAL-NAMES (OF) SYSTEM (rer ) STOP. Go to Step 8 if there is no definition of logical name SYSTEM:, or if the definition of 1logical name SYSTEM: includes the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. Go to Step 9 does not if include there the is a definition of logical directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. name SYSTEM: that UPDATING I’Enep 8: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 Give the "EDEFINE Command Name SYSTEM: Without to RELEASE Define Including 4.1 SOFTWARE System-Wide Logical PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> in the Definition. If no definition of logical name SYSTEM: 1is shown in the 1list of logical name definitions, give the command: CTRL/E DEFINE and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints, (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME). Type SYSTEM: and PS:<SYSTEM> Press If a the press the ESCAPE and press the RETURN key again. definition of RETURN logical Now name key. The key. The go Step to SYSTEM: system system 1is prints (AS). prints, Type [CONFIRM]. 9. shown that 1includes the directory PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>, you should give a CTRL/E DEFINE command to include all the items of the definition except PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>. The example name (OF) below SYSTEM: SYSTEM, shows shown to one how you would e SINFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES => SYS: NEW: => PS:<NEW>», SYS: OLD: => PS:<0OLD>, SYS: SYS: => PS:<MEXN>, TT: => => the definition of logical (50 HLP: SYSTEM: change by the command, INFORMATION (ABOUT) LOGICAL-NAMES that does not include PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. (OF) SYSTEM(Crer) PS:<SUBSYS> PS:<S-MEXN>, PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>, PS:<SYSTEM> TTY: Gfil’ Ce) SEDEFINE (SYSTEM LOGICAL NAME) PS:<SYSTEM> Gir) CesD { SYSTEM: (AS) PS:<S-MEXN>,-(Rr) [CONFIRM] (Gar) S l’»Step 9: Mount the Installation Tape on MTAQO: and Give the Following Commands. ESC SREWIND (DEVICE) $SKIP (DEVICE) I’»Step 10: To run ESCAPE MTAO: (rer) MTAO: 4 FILES(xer) Give the Command: RUN (PROGRAM) MTAO: Key. the DLUSER key. program The RETURN key. After DLUSER prompt. S RUN (PROGRAM) DLUSER> system the from magnetic prints DLUSER MTAQ:(rer) tape, (PROGRAM). program starts, and Press the RETURN type RUN Type MTAO: and the system press and press prints the the the UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE If you make a typing mistake, rewind the tape, Error: skip four and Press The following example files, and reissue the command above. on is on MTAO:. tape shows how to do this when the Installati Lo SREWIND (DEVICE) MTAO: (Cesc $SKIP | (DEVICE) MTAO: 4 FILESCwmD) (ESC ) $RUN (PROGRAM) MTAOQ: (&) DLUSER> .» Step "‘11: S Give the DLUSER Command: the RETURN KeY LOAD (FROM FILE) MTAO: L - | To load the dlrectory structure 1nto the flle system from the the system prints DONE. and the DLUSER prompt. few seconds, Cese) . i B | TOPS-20 The system and press the ESCAPE key. a After and press the RETURN key. type LOAD Type MTAOQ: Installation tape, prints (FROM FILE). "DLUSER>LOAD (FROM FILE) ' MTAO:(Hf) The system prints DONE. DLUSER> I"Step 12: Type EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. Type EXIT and press the RETURN key to 1eave the DLUSER system prints © the TOPS-20 enabled prompt. program. The DLUSER>EXITGID S » Step 13: Give the Command: SKiP (DEVICE)"MT'AIO: QI‘IFII.ESI. To sklp over the Pelease 4. 1 DUMPER program stored on the Installatlon tape, give the SKIP command. The sy>tem prlnts the enabled prompt. | $SKIP $ (DEVICE) MTAG: 1 FILES(rer) UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 m) Step 14: Give the Command: TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE R PROGRAM DUMPER.EXE and Press the RETURN Ve . TER CenE _ Key. AVR To run the Release 4 DUMPER program, type R afid"préSé'tfiéfifiééfififivhkey; The system prints (PROGRAM). Type DUM and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints PER.EXE. Press the RETURN key. After the DUMPER program starts, version, and the then system prints the the DUMPER prompt. ' word DUMPER, the current ' $ R‘ (PROGRAM) DUMl"ER. EXE The system prints DUMPER 4 (172) DUMPER> Error: If you receive any errors, rewind the tapé;“skip'ISii"filés and reissue the command above. DIGITAL Software Support. SREWIND (DEVICE) SSKIP $R The | (DEVICE) (PROGRAM) system The following example shows If errors still persist, how to do this for MTAO:. - contact o MTAO: (Ger) MTAQ: 6 FILES(rer) DUMPER.EXE (er) prints DUMPER 4 (172) DUMPER> m) Step 15: Give the DUMPER Command: the RETURN Key. and Press TAPE (FILESPEC) MTAO: - | To tell the DUMPER program which tape drive you ate USifig; ‘type and press the ESC key. press the RETURN key. The system prints . The | system prints DUMPER> (FILESPEC) MTAO:(Cre) . TAPE Type MTAO: and The system prints the DUMPER prompt. _ DUMPER> TAPE (FILESPEC). . UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 mp Step 16: Give the Command: PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> RESTORE and Press RELEASE (TAPE the 4.1 SOFTWARE FILES) PS:<*>* %, % RETURN Key. (TO) To copy the TOPS-20 monitor and 1its related programs from the Installation tape to your public structure, type RESTORE and press the ESC key. The system prints (MTA FILES). Press the ESC key again. The system prints PS:<*>* * * (TO). Type PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM> and press the RETURN key. This DUMPER command restores all the files in the first saveset to the are restored, the files the all When PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. directory system prints the message END OF SAVESET and the DUMPER prompt. < DUMPER> RESTORE (MTA FILES) PS:<*>%.%.% (TO) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>(®i) DUMPER TAPE #1, "NEW-SYSTEM FOR RELEASE 4.1", THURSDAY, 2-AUG-82 2020 LOADING FILE(S) INTO PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> END OF SAVESET DUMPER> NOTE contains restored The Saveset you have just The files. and TOPS20.DOC TOPS20.BWR the too made changes TOPS20.BWR file describes Please in this manual. inclusion for late before entirety their 1in read these files continuing with your installation. mpStep 17: Give the Command: PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> RESTORE (TAPE % PS:<*>*.* FILES) and Press the RETURN Key. (TO) PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>. directory the to Restore the system program files The system prints (MTA FILES). press the ESC key. and RESTORE Type Type (TO). . *.* PS:<*>* The system prints Press the ESC key again. RETURN key. When all the files are press the and PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> DUMPER the system prints the message END OF SAVESET and the restored, ' ' prompt. s DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER TAPE #1, LOADING END OF DUMPER> FILE(S) SAVESET (MTA FILES) PS:<*>*.*.* (TO) PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>(Gr) "NEW-SUBSYS FOR RELEASE 4.1", INTO PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> THURSDAY, 2-AUG-82 2020 UPDATING M) Step 18: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 Give the DUMPER Command: (TO) PS:<UETP.LIB>*.*.,* RELEASE RESTORE and Press (TAPE the 4.1 SOFTWARE FILES) RETURN PS:<¥>* % * Key. To restore the files for the User Environment Test Package. RESTORE and press the ESC key. The system prints (MTA FILES). the ESC key again. PS:<UETP.LIB> the RETURN END OF and key. SAVESET The press When and all the system the ESC the DUMPER prints key. files The are PS:<*>* * * system restored, Type Press (TO), prints *,* the system Type *, Press prints prompt. e DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER TAPE LOADING END OF #1, FILE(S) (MTA "UETP INTO FOR FILES) PS:<*>*.*.*% RELEASE 4.1", (TO) PS:<UETP.LIB>*.*.*(wr) THURSDAY, 2-AUG-82 2020 PS:<UETP.LIB> SAVESET DUMPER> I’S%ep 19: Give the DUMPER Command: To terminate the level, type EXIT EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. DUMPER program and return and press the RETURN key. to the TOPS-20 command DUMPER>EXIT (Rer) $ M)Step 20: Give the Command: RETURN UNLOAD (DEVICE) MTAO: and Press the Key. To rewind and unload the tape on MTAO:, type UNLOAD and press the ESC key. The system prints (DEVICE). Type MTAO: and press the RETURN key. (esc ) SUNLOAD (DEVICE) MTAO: $ B.1.1 In case rename Renaming you it ever the Release need before <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE. to 4 Monitor revert copying to the the Release Release 4 monitor, 4.1. you must monitor 1into UPDATING wpStep 21: . To THE Give the TO TOPS-20 Command : . ..FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and Press the RETURN Key. rename and ESC DECSYSTEM-2020 (TO BE) save the Release 4 monitor, key. The system RELEASE 4.1 RENAME (EXISTING PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE ' type RENAME prints SOFTWARE and (EXISTING press FILE). the Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and press the ESC key. The system prints (TO BE). Type PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE and press the RETURN key. When the rename 1is successfully completed, the system prints a message specifying that the file was renamed correctly. $SRENAME (EXISTING FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (TO BE) PS:<SYSTEM>4~-MONITR.EXE(rer) <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE s . 1 => PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE.l1 PS: <NEW~-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE and Press the RETURN Key. ESC PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE prints system The key. (TO) into PS:<SYSTEM>, To copy the Release 4.1 monitor (FROM) CoPY Command: the Give m) Step 22: the [OK] . press type COPY and Type (FROM) . PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE (typ designates the type of monitor you have selected for your system) and press the ESC key. The system prints (TO). Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and press the RETURN key. When the copy is successfully completed, the system prints a message specifying that the file was copied =) = $COPY (FROM) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE <KNEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE., B.1.2 correctly. => (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE(xe) <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.1l [OK] Creating the File PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD You must create system the file PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD to declare parameters. mp Step 23: Give the Command: (OUTPUT AS) EDIT (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. To edit PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD and to have the changes placed in PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD, type EDIT and press the ESC key. The system prints (FILE). Type PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD and press the ESC key. The system prints the generation number of that file and (OUTPUT AS). Type PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the RETURN The system prints, EDIT:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD and the EDIT prompt. SEDIT The (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 system prints EDIT:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 * key. (OUTPUT AS) P35:<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD(xr) UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE I’Step 24: To print RETURN EDIT Give the Edit Command: the contents of key. The SOFTWARE P":* and Press the RETURN Key. <SYSTEM>CONFIG.CMD, system prints 4.1 the type P ":* and entire CONFIG.CMD press file and then the the prompt. EDIT:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD.1 B.1.3 Changing System Parameters Read Chapter 3 of this manual (Tailoring the System), and make any changes to the system parameters that are necessary. One parameter that must be added is the definition for the logical name SYS:. add the following command to the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. DEFINE SYS: PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>,PS:<SUBSYS> Another parameter that must be changed is the definition of logical name SYSTEM:. You must define it so that the first element of the search list is the directory, PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. If the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD file contains a line that defines logical name SYSTEM:, vou must replace it with a line that has PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM> as the first element of the search list. The example below shows how to replace a definition of SYSTEM: on line 700 of the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD file with a corrected line. 500 MAGTAPE 600 TIMEZONE 700 DEFINE *R700(e) 700 1 449 5 SYSTEM: DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<S-MEXN>, PS:<SYSTFM> PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, PS:<S-MEXN>, If the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD file does not contain a SYSTEM:, add DEFINE the following SYSTEM: line to the PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, 4-1-CONFIG.CMD PS:<SYSTEM> (&) definition file: of PS:<SYSTEM> NOTE When you are making a change to the system parameters, use the EDIT command R line number. Any changes made to the system parameters will be made only in <NEW~-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. The file <SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD will remaln the same. *Step 25: After Press the ESC Key, Type EU, and Press the RETURN Key. you make all output file. the necessary changes to the system parameters, press the ESC key, type EU, and press the RETURN key. This command ends the EDIT program and saves the file, The system prints the name of the Cese ) *éU [<NEW-SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1] B-10 UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE under system the up bringing - Before the check you should 4.1, " Release SYSJOB.RUN and PTYCON.ATO Release 4.1 the Release 4 PTYCON.ATO against ~files - have not You do .and SYSJOB.RUN files. these files if you have not compare ~to and PTYCON.ATO Release 4 - changed the ‘SYSJOB.RUN files. However, if you have 4 Release made your own changes to the SYSJOB.RUN and you wish and - PTYCON.ATO Release wunder exist to - .those changes the changes to the add must you 4.1, Release 4.1 PTYCON.ATC and SYSJOB.RUN. “ECREATE Give the Command: #) Step 26: Press the RETURN Key. (DIRECTORY) PS:<OPERATOR> and 100. group of member user You must be sure that the operator is a prints system The key. ESCAPE the press and CREATE CTRL/E Type The system Type PS:<OPERATOR and press the RETURN key. (DIRECTORY). ($§$). prompt subcommand enabled the gives and [01d] prints $"ECREATE (DIRECTORY) PS:<OPERATOR>(rer) [014d] Type USER 100 and Press the RETURN Key Twice. #) Step 27: The system key. RETURN Give the subcommand USER 100 and press the Press the RETURN key again to ($$). prompt subcommand the repeats return to TOPS-20 command level. $SUSER 100 Gw) 39CID Give the Command: CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> and W) Step 28: Press the RETURN Key. and press CONNECT To connect to the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>, type Type PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). ESC key. the enabled the TOPS-20 system prints The and press the RETURN key. prompt. = SCONNECT $ (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>( rei) CAUTION You must perform the ten steps indicated Release 4.1 the save to 29 Step in If microprocessor file system on disk. you do not perform these steps, you will Step - be unable to resume timesharing in perform the error then must You 35. recovery procedure shown in Step 35. B-11 UPDATING BpStep 29: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Perform Steps 136 through 145 in Chapter 5 of This Manual to Save mpStep 30: the Microprocessor File System on Disk. Make Sure All GALAXY Queues are Empty. Because GALAXY queues are 4.1, you must be sure Release TO 4.1 system. these Jjobs them later. and Any automatically l"Step 3l: You send jobs not compatible between Release 4 and Release all queues are empty before bringing up the may allow all pending jobs to run, or a message to the owners asking them to left in the queues past this point delete re-submit will be deleted. Give the Command: DELETE PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE~FILE.QUASAR and Press the RETURN Key. When the GALAXY quéues are empty, PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY~-MASTER-QUEUE~-FILE.QUASAR. for the new GALAXY $DELETE delete (FILES) and Time and system RETURN prints (RESUMING [OK] “ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) Press the RETURN Key. To bring the system down, type CTRL/E CEASE and The system prints (TIMESHARING AT). Type +1 and The AT). Type the date +1 press press and SECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) +1 (RESUMING AT) date and time(ri1) System shutdown scheduled for 2-SEP-82 13:47:00, System going down in one minutel! [System down, up again at 2-SEP-82 13:48:00 down] NOTE Wait for down] . the system to print (RESUMING AT) the ESC the ESCAPE key. key. time key. System 'file, system PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FIL Give the Command: Date the programs. E.QUASARCwr) PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR.1 W Step 32: the This prepares [System and press the UPDATING ) Sstep 33: To DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE The system Type CTRL/\. return ENABLED THE to KS10 command and the prompt 1level, type CTRL/\. prints KS10>. E NABLED KS10> l’»Step 34: Type SH and Press the RETURN Key. To shut down the monitor, type SH and press the RETURN key. The system prints KS10>USR MOD, **HALTED**, and a message similiar to: $HLTD/000001 PC000000,,010062. KS10>SHCrer) KS10>USR MOD **HALTED* * $h1td/000001$Spc000000, ,010062 I"Step 35: Press the BOOT Switch on the Control Panel. To restart the Release 4.1 monitor, press control panel. Within 15 seconds the MOUNTED], then KS10>BT [PS for the date DATE AND TIME: and time. the [PS SW MOUNTED] ENTER ERROR: asks the BROOT switch on system prints BRT SW and CURRENT If the system does not ask minutes after you press performed the procedures example below shows how to [PS for the date and time within two the BOOT switch, you may have in Step 29 1incorrectly. The recover from this condition. MOUNTED] ENABLED KS10>BT BOOT>4-MONITR. EXE (Ger) System ENTER restarting, CURRENT DATE wait... AND TIME: Now you can perform Steps 135 through 145 in Chapter 5 of this manual. Then type CTRL/C and log in to the system again as OPERATOR, enable your capabilities, and begin again with Step 32, above. UPDATING ‘Step 36: After THE DECSYSTEM-2020 the prompt, type press the ENTER CURRENT YOU IS HAVE THIS l"Step 37: After the date RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE RETURN DATE ENTERED CORRECT AND in this format: TIME: SUNDAY, 2-SEP-82 1324(w1) 2-SEPTEMBER-82 1:24 PM, (Y,N) Type Y or N and Press the RETURN Key. the date and step. YOU HAVE THIS WHY ENTERED CORRECT SUNDAY, (Y,N) time, check to be sure that Y and press the RETURN key. press the RETURN key, and go 2-SEPTEMBER-82 1:24 it is If the date or back to the PM, y(wmr) RELOAD? l"Step 38: Type TS reason, time key: the system prints IS and hhmm correct. If it is, type time is incorrect, type N, last TOPS—-20 Type the Date and Time and Press the RETURN Key. day-month-year Then TO Type TS and Press the RETURN Key. and press the RETURN. When you bring up the system for type one of the abbreviations listed in Table 6-1 of any this manual. WHY RELOAD? TS (rer) <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT IS DISABLED RUN CHECKD? M) Step 39: FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION Type N and Press the RETURN Key. You do not have to run the CHECKD program unless unexpectedly or press the RUN RETURN key. The that system there may be disk runs the the system errors. crashes Type N and DDMP program: CHECKD? N(xv) RUNNING B.1.4 you suspect DDMP Running CNVDSK To prepare your system for the new file archiving and migration feature, you must run the CNVDSK program. CNVDSK, which must be run during timesharing, enlarges the FDB (File Descriptor Block) of each file that is not open. For this reason, you should run CNVDSK as soon as you bring up the Release 4.1 other users have logged in, system if possible. for timesharing but before UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE If you did not use the TOPS-20 Tape Archiving feature with TOPS-20 Version 4, but are planning on using the Tape Archiving feature with TOPS-20 Version 4.1, you must run the CNVDSK progrem to enlarge the file descriptor block of each file that 1s not opened. The version 4.1 files have already been formatted for the Tape Archiving feature. l’>Step 40: Type CTRL/C at the Console Terminal to Start a Job. gNSTALLATIONwTEST_SYSTEM, TOPS-20 MONITOR 4.1 (5443) I’»Step 41: Log in to the System with Wheel or Operator Capabilities. INSTALLATION-TEST SYSTEM, TOPS-20 MONITOR 4.1(5443) TM (e @LOGIN (USER) OPERATOR‘(PASSWORD) password (ACCOUNT) account(re) I’»Step 42: Give the RETURN Command: ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) and To enable your capabilities, type ENABLE and press the ESC system prints (CAPABILITIES). Press the RETURN key. prints the Press the Key. TOPS-20 enabled key. The The system prompt. Ces) @ENABLE ' (CAPABILITIES)(®mD) $ »Step 43: Give the Command: CNVDSK file:. Program R CNVDSK and Press the RETURN Responds with the Prompt: Output Key. errors The to To enlarge the FDBs of all the disk files on your system so they can include archiving information, run the CNVDSK program. The CNVDSK program asks for the name of the file where you want to record any errors encountered by SR CNVDSK Crer) Output errors to file: the program. UPDATING l.>Step 44: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE Type ERRORS.LOG and Press the RETURN Key. You can give any new file specification to CNVDSK for recording errors encountered while the program runs. It is recommended that you give ERRORS.LOG as this file specification. Then any errors encountered by the CNVDSK program will be found in PS:<OPERATOR>ERRORS.LOG. Type ERRORS.LOG and press the RETURN key. The CNVDSK program responds with the prompt, Convert files: Output errors to file: ERRORS .LOGCre1) Convert files: I’»Step 45: Press the ESCAPE Key. Press the RETURN The Program Prints DSK¥*:<*>% * *, Key. You can specify any combination of files and/or directories to be converted by the CNVDSK program. Converted files are compatible with non-converted files. ©Not running CNVDSK will have no effect on your system's performance, although then you cannot use the new archiving and migration features. Therefore, it is recommended that you take the default, which 1s DSK*:<*>* * * (311 files on all mounted structures). Press the ESCAPE key. The CNVDSK program prints DSK*: (x> % * %, Press the RETURN key. The CNVDSK program prints a list of Convert the directories that 1t converts. files: D) % % % DSK*:<*> (re1 PS: <ROOT-DIRECTORY> PS :<ACCOUNTS> I)ERep 46: Give the Command: PRINT ERRORS.LOG and Press the RETURN Key. To obtain a record of errors encontered by the CNVDSK program, print the error log file. Type PRINT and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints (FILES). Type ERRORS.LOG and press the RETURN key. A 1listing of the file ERRORS.LOG will be printed on your line printer. ) (Ese | $ PRINT (FILES) {Job ERRORS ERRORS.LOG(xer) Queued, Request-ID 1, Limit 27] UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE I}Enep 47: Examine the Line Printer Listing of ERRORS.LOG. Examine the listing of the error file produced by the CNVDSK program Normally several files of type it was unable to convert. files for is expected This .EXE from directory PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> will be shown. they represent programs that were started during the system because start-up procedures of Step 39. Other files from system directories You should save this listing. may also be shown for similar reasons. The TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide gives instructions for converting any fi1les shown by the listing. B.2 REVERTING TO RELEASE l’»Step 1: 4 Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. e l’suep 2: (PASSWORD) password (USER) OPERATOR @LOGIN (CAPABILITIES) Give the Command: ENABLE (ACCOUNT) account(rer) and Press the RETURN Key. To enable your capabilities, type ENABLE and press the ESC the RETURN key. Press (CAPABILITIES). system prints the TOPS-20 prints The Kkey. The system prompt. enabled (Cesc ) @ENABLE $ W) Step 3: Give (CAPABILITIES)(Gii) Command: CONNECT the Press the RETURN (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> and Key. Connect to the directory PS:<SYSTEM> by typing CONNECT and pressing Type PS:<SYSTEM> and The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). the ESC key. press the RETURN key. SCONNECT The system prints the TOPS-20 enabled prompt. (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>(xer) $ I"Step 4: Give the Command: the RETURN RUN PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>SMFILE.EXE and Press Key. To run the Release 4.1 SMFILE program, type RUN PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>SMF and Press the Return The system prints ILE.EXE.l. the ESCAPE key. press SMFILE> the gives and messages some prints program SMFILE The key. prompt., SRUN PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>SMFILE.EXE.,1(rer) DECSYSTEM-2020 DIAGNOSTICS FE-FILE PROGRAM VERSION 0.3, TOPS-20, KS10, CPU#=4097 [FOR HELP TYPE SMFILE> "HELP"] UPDATING l"Step 5: To DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 rebuild 145 .Step 5A: Because the Release 4 microprocessor 1n Chapter 5 of GALAXY Release this queues are be sure must 4.1 »Step 5B: system. file system, perform Steps 136 You not compatible all can queues allow all between are empty pending Release before jobs 4 and Release bringing up run, delete to or the owners asking them to gueue past this point the re-submit will be Give the Command: DELETE the the PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE-QUASAR RETURN new GALAXY GALAXY and Press Key. queues are empty, delete PS:<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR. the SOFTWARE manual. these Jjobs and send a message to them later. Jobs left 1in the automatically deleted. for 4.1 Make Sure All GALAXY Queues are Empty. vyou When RELEASE Perform Steps 137 through 145 in Chapter 5 of This Manual. through 4.1, THE This the prepares file, the system programs. SDELETE (FILES) PS: <SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER QUEUE-FILE.QUASAR(R) PS :<SPOOL>PRIMARY-MASTER-QUEUE~FILE.QUASAR.1[OK] B Step 6: Give the Command: PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE Press In Section the RETURN B.1l.1 press the ESC key. PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE BE) . rename that the renamed (EXISTING and monitor to this and The system Type press the has been the Release prints ESC key. 4 (EXISTING The FILE). system prints press the RETURN key. the system prints a renamed correctly. (s SRENAME FILES) you are reverting to Release 4, PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE. Type RENAME and file (EXISTING PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE If into Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE and has been successfully executed, specifying BE) Key. you PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE. monitor must be put back RENAME (TO ESC FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE (TO PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE (rr) <SYSTEM>4-MONITR.EXE.1l => <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE [OK] BE) (TO When the message UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE NOTE examilne 4, Before reverting to Release Be f1le. PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD the sure it contains a definition of logical and that this definition SYSTEM:, name directory, the include not does PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>. If 1t does 1include directory, this when you to revert 4 monitor will Release the 4 Release not attempt to operate programs that do function properly in a Release 4 system. If the PS:<SYSTEM>4-CONFIG.CMD file does not contain a definition of logical name command following the SYSTEM:, insert into the file: DEFINE ) Step 7: Give the Command: SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM> "ECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) +1 Date and Time and Press the RETURN Key. (RESUMING AT) key. ESC the press To bring the system down, type CTRL/E CEASE and Type +1 and press the ESC key. (TIMESHARING AT). system prints The want you time and date Type the The system prints (RESUMING AT). The system the RETURN key. press and again start to timesharing prints a list of messages. The last message is [System down]. CEs) G SECEASE (TIMESHARING AT) [System down] mp Step 8: +1 (RESUMING AT) date and time(rer) Type CTRL/\. When (backslash). To return to KS10 command level, type CTRL/\ are at KS10 command level, the system prints the prompt KS10>. you ‘ENABLED KS10> ’Step 9: Type SH and Press the RETURN Key. To stop the TOPS-20 monitor, type SH and press the system prints three KS10>SHGD KS10>USR MOD **HALTED* * $HLTD/000001 »Step 10: To on RETURN key. The messages. PS/000000,,010372 Press the BOOT Switch on the Control Panel. reload the Release 4 monitor from the disk, press the BOOT the control panel and answer the usual start-up questions. B-19 button UPDATING B.3 MAKING THE The steps comfortable mpStep 1: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 RELEASE 1in this with the 4.1 TO TOPS-20 MONITOR THE RELEASE PERMANENT section should be Release 4.1 software. 4.1 SOFTWARE MONITOR performed when vyou feel Log in to the System with OPERATOR or WHEEL Capabilities. (s LOGIN »Step 2: () (USER) OPRERATOR () (PASSWORD) Give the Command: ENABLE - 5wmyd (ACCOUNT) (CAPABILITIES) oro~unt{ul) e and Press the RETURN Key. To perform ENABLE Press the and the next press RETURN step you must enable the ESC key. The your system capabilities. prints Type (CAPABILITIES). key. (e) $ ‘Step 3: Give the Command: CONNECT Press to the the RETURN To connect the ESC key. The directory and press the RETURN system (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> and Key. PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>, prints (TO type DIRECTORY). CONNECT Type and press PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> key. e $CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) DI'S:<MEW-SVSTE (kT M> ) $ NOTE If you had to revert to the Release 4 monitor, you must perform Steps 136 through 145 1n Chapter 5 of this manual at this time to microprocessor l"Step 4: To recreate file Give the Command: COPY (FROM) (TO) copy the press PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE TOPS-20 Release ESC key. the 4.1 PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE and monitor The and the a message informing you of 4.1 PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE Press to press this. the RETURN MONITR.EXE, system prints the prints (TO) . Type PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE When the Release 4 monitor has been copied prints Release system. ESC Key. type COPY (FROM) . key. and press the successfully, The and Type system RETURN key. the system UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 (_Es¢ ) $COPY ' (FROM) SOFTWARE (s FS:<NEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE <NEW-SYSTEM>2020-MONtyp.EXE.1l => <SYSTEM>MONITR.EXE.1[OK] M)Step 5: COPY Command: the Give PS:<SYSTEM>*.* and Press (FROM) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.* (TO) the RETURN Key. and COPY type To copy the directory PS:<NEW-SYSTEM> to PS:<SYSTEM>, Type PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>* The system prints (FROM). press the ESC key. and PS:<8YS Type (TO). The system prints and press the ESC key. Press the RETURN key. The system prints TEM>*.*, the ESC key. press copied The system prints & message specifying that each file has been correctly. ESC | @ $COPY (FROM) PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>*.,* (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>*.,* w1 mpStep 6: Give the PS:<SUBSYS> Command: and Press COPY (FROM) PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.* the RETURN Key. (TO) To copy the directory PS:<NEW-SUBSYS> to PS:<SUBSYS>, type COPY and * Type PS:<NEW-SUBSYS>*, The system prints (FROM). press the ESC key. and press the ESC key. The system prints (TO). Type PS:<SUB and press the ESC key. The system prints SYS>*.*., Press the RETURN key. The system prints a message specifying that each file has been copied correctly. CeO) $COPY ) Step 7: CsO (FROM) Give P3:<NEW-SUBSYS>*.* the Press_the (TO) PS:<SUBSYS>*.*(w.) Command: CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> RETURN Key. Connect to the directory PS:<SYSTEM> by typing the ESC key. The system prints press the RETURN key. o $ (TO DIRECTORY) CONNECT and and pressing (TO DIRECTORY). Type PS:<SYSTEM> and S R ESC $CONNECT CsD } PS:<SYSTEM>(ker) UPDATING mpStep 8: THE Give the Command: Press To edit system RETURN DECSYSTEM-2020 the the RETURN TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE EDIT (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and Key. 4-1-CONFIG.CMD, type EDIT and press the ESC key. (FILE). Type PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press prints The the key. Cesc) $ EDIT (FILE) The system EDIT: PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD(krer) prints: 4-1-CONFIG.CMD * mp Step 9: To Give the EDIT Command: print the contents of P":* and Press the RETURN Key. PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD, press the RETURN key. The file and then the EDIT prompt. system prints the type entire P":* and 4-1-CONFIG.CMD * PTG l’>Step 10: Give the EDIT Command: R Line Number and Press the RETURN Key. The parameter DEFINE SYS: PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>, PS:<SUBSYS> must be replaced by DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM>. To do this, type an R and the line number where DEFINE SYS: PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>, PS:<SUBSYS> is located; then press the RETURN key. The system prints the line number you entered in the R command. 1In the example below, the parameter 1is located at line 00500. * R500Cr) The system prints 00500 I’»Step 11: To Type DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM> and Press the RETURN Key. define press the 00500 The system 1 SYSTEM: as RETURN key. PS:<SYSTEM>, DEFINE SYSTEM: type DEFINE SYSTEM: PS:<SYSTEM> and PS:<SYSTEM>(rer) prints LINES (00500/1) DELETED * W) Step 12: To end RETURN TOPS-20 Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. the EDIT program and key. The system command prompt. save * RU(re1) [<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD. 2] $ the prints file, type EU and <SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD.2 press the and the UPDATING THE DECSYSTEM-2020 TO TOPS-20 RELEASE 4.1 SOFTWARE l’»Step 13. G1ve the Command" CONNECT and Press the RETURN Key. and ‘Connect back to your log in dlrectory by typlng CONNECT pressing the RETUPN key _$c0NNECqul)"“" SCOMNECTLSE)., | W) step 14: Give the Command: DELETE (FILfisj PS: <NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.* and - Press the RETURN Key DELETE and To delete the flles 1n the dlrectory PS <NEW~SYSTEM>, type Type (FILES) . prints system The key. ESC the press PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.* and press the RETURN key. The system ' [OK] message for each flle 1t deletes prints an re- e o o o s & 8 " $DELETE (FILES) PS:<NEW-SYSTEM>*.*.*(ED I’»Step 15: Give the Command: DELETE (FiLES}. PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>*.*.* and : Press the RETURN Key ' and To delete the flles 1n the dlrectory PS <NEWSUBSYS>, type DELETE Type (FILES). prints system The Key. the ESC press PS: <NEW-SUBSYS>*.* ., * and press the RETURN key. The system prints [OK] message for each flle 1t deletes. -U}-:c' . e & ®» e 8 o p_f‘j:b i :E$DELETE (FILES) PS <NEWSUBGYS>* w x an UPDATING B Step 16: THE DECSYSTEM-2020 Give the Command: Date and Time system prints timesharing to prints a list of (CTRL/E) ( Esc ! Press To halt prompt 4.1 SOFTWARE (TIMESHARING AT) +1 the (RESUMING AT) RETURN Key. CTRL/E CEASE and press the ESCAPE AT). Type +1 and press the ESCAPE AT). ) Type the date and time you key. key. want system ESC (TIMESHARING AT) [System W) Step 17: (RESUMING RELEASE start again and press the RETURN key. The messages. The last message is [System down]. | $"ECEASE TOPS-20 “ECEASE and Shut down the system by typing The system prints (TIMESHARING The TO +1 { (RESUMING AT) dote and time(wr) down] Type CTRL/\. the TOPS-20 monitor, type CTRL/\. The system prints the KS10>. KS10> ’Step 18: To shut Type SH and Press the RETURN Key. down the system, type SH and press the RETURN prints the messages KS10>USR MOD and **HALTED**, to: $HLTD/000001 PC/000000,,010372. and key. a The message system similar KS10>8i1 G KS10>USR MOD **HALTED* * $HLTD/000001 .Step 19: To run switch the on PC/000000,,010372 Press the BOOT Switch. Release the 4.1 control TOPS-20 panel software and answer from the disk, usual press start-up NOTE If you ever Release the 4 have monitor Release Release .Step 20: 4 4 to you revert to the must re-install software, Installation using the tape. Perform the Steps in Chapter 8 of This Manual. the BOOT questions. APPENDIX POCKET This appendix TOPS-20 INSTALLATION contains software on a an example FOR of DECSYSTEM-20 STEP 1 GUIDE C THE a typical Model 2040. 1installation Read all your 2 Have the disk packs 3 Power up the system. 4 Label the disk packs. 5 Mount the disk packs. 6 Check the Controller 7 Mount System Floppy A in drive 0. 8 Mount System Floppy B in drive 1. 9 Mount the TOPS-20 10 Place the front-end 11 Set 12 Press the the the 1instructions Switch the [SYO: [DX0: in this manual before formatted Select Software HALT Register ENABLE and VB14-45G Installation to in 000007 SWITCH TO necessary. switches. switch 6:11 REDIRECTED MOUNTED] 1f the tape on ENABLE REGISTER position. buttons simultaneously. 23-0CT-79 DXO0:] [DX1: MOUNTED] VERSION VB12-12 ENTER DIALOG [NO,YES,EXIT,BOOT] RUNNING KLI>YES(R1) KL1 -- KL10 S/N: KL1 -- KL10 HARDWARE INTERNAL 2102., MODEL A, 60 HERTZ ENVIRONMENT: CHANNELS CACHE RELOAD MICROCODE ([YES,VERIFY,FIX,NO]? KLI>YES(r1) KLI--- MICROCODE KLI-- RECONFIGURE VERSION CACHE 231 MTAO:. (octal). KLI--- KLI-- proceeding 1nstallation. RSX-20F 14 of OPERATION with 13 DECSYSTEM-20 LOADED [FILE,ALL,YES,NO]? POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 KLI>ALL(wir) 16 KLI-- ALL CACHES ENABLED KLI-- CONFIGURE KL MEMORY 17 [FILE,ALL,REVERSE,FORCE,YES,NO}? KLI> ALL(rer) LOGICAL MEMORY CONFIGURATION: CONTROLLER ADDRESS SIZE RQO RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 CONTYPE INT 00000000 128K 00 01 00 01 MA20 4 00400000 128K 02 18 KLI>MTBOOT(®r) 19 KLI>NO(wr) 36 MTBOOT>/ L (rer ) LOADED, 03 KLI KLI-- 02 MAZ20 -- WRITE CONFIGURATION BOOTSTRAP CHN:2 VERIFIED, 03 AND LOADED DX20:0 AND 4 FILE [YES,NO}? STARTED MICROCODE VERSION 1(0) STARTED MTBOOT> /G143 (a1 37 [FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TYPE "?2" TO ANY OF THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS.! FILE SYSTEM ON THE PUBLIC STRUCTURE? 38 DO YOU WANT TO REPLACE THE 39 DO 40 HOW 42 ON WHICH 44 DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT SWAPPING 47 DO YOU WANT THE SIZE 49 DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT SIZE BOOTSTRAP AREA? YOU WANT TO MANY PACKS 51 THE ARE THIS IN PUBLIC STRUCTURE? STRUCTURE: "CHANNEL,CONTROLLER,UNIT" [STRUCTURE "PS" [PS MOUNTED] ¥NO SETSPD SYSTEM DEFINE FRONT-END SUCCESSFULLY RESTARTING, 24-OCTOBER-1982 IS THIS CORRECT RELOAD? DDMP (Y ,N) Y(wD) NO SYSJOB (lllll;(') |C EXEC 55 MX>GET FILE MTAQ: (1) INTERRUPT AT 0 56 MX>GET FILE YES(wo) YES(w1) 24-0CT-82 1200k YOU HAVE 12:00PM, INSTALLATION (i) 54 NO YES(Ck) SYSTEM? <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND RUNNING 1,-1,0(x0) WAIT... AND TIME: WHY # 0 MOUNTED: DEFINED] ENTERED WEDNESDAY, 53 1(&i1) SPACE? ENTER CURRENT DATE 52 YES(GRer) IS LOGICAL PACK FILE YES(Cwi) MTAOQO: (rer) (again) - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 57 MX>START (w1 TOPS-20 COMMAND PROCESSOR 58 @CNABLE 59 SRUN 5.1(1354) (i) (CAPABILITIES) Crvd MTAN: (&) (PROGRAM) ) Cis 60 DLUSER>LOAD (FROM FILE) MTAQ: (ki) DONE. 61 DLUSER>EXTT(xit) 62 SRUN 63 DUMPER>TAPE T { _ (PROGRAM) _. MTAOQ:(r1) (TFT (DEVICE) MTA0: ) 64 DUMPER>RESTORE (s (TAPE FILES) INTO END 64A OF PS:<*>*,* % Chd (TO) PS:<SYSTEM>*.* *( ) ,THURSDAY, "NEW-SYSTEM FOR RELEASE 4.1" DUMPER TAPE # 1, FILE(S) i) 2-AUG-79 12:07 PS:<SYSTEM> SAVESET DUMPER>!CC§1) Crs) 64B $TY%E (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR() o) $TYPE 64D (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC(Cur) E G () SCONTINU () 65 DUMPER>RESTORFE DUMPER TAPE # 1, LOADING END OF Crsd (TAPE FILES) FILE(S) % & PS:<*>* "NEW-SUBSYS FOR RELEASE 4.1", THURSDAY, (s (TAPE PS:<UBTP.L *IBI* *(arr) DUMPER TAPE # 1, END OF 2-AUG-79 12:10 SAVESET DUMPERY»RESTORE LOADING PS:<SUBSYS>*,*.*(wi) INTO PS:<SUBSYS> ¢ 66 Crd (TO) FILE[(S) SAVESET FILES) "UETP.LIB FOR RELEASE 4.1" INTO PS:<SUBSYS> | PS:< Aok Kk % ,THURSDAY, (TO) 2-AUG-79 12:10 LOADING POCKET 67 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 (1) DUMPER>EXIT Cix 68 SUNLOAD (DEVICE) 70 SCONNECT 71 SCOPY (TO DIRECTORY) (FROM) MONMED.EXE MONMED.EXE.l1 72 MTAO: (i) $TERMINAL { => PS:<SYSTEM> (wii) | (TO) MONITR.EXE (1) MONITR.EXE.1;P777700 (MODE IS) NO [OK] RAISE(Cwer) D) 73 SCOPY (FROM) TTY: (TO) MONNAM.TXTCEz) TTY: => MONNAM.TXT.1 Installation-test System(Rrer) {Z GO 74 $COPY TTY: GO (FROM) => TTY: (TO) TAPNAM.TXT () TAPNAM.TXT.1l Instal-tst(rer) CIRL /) | "2 SCREATE INPUT: 76 00100 00200 00300 00400 80 4-1-CONFIG.CMD (rer) ! Terminal Speeds(rer) ! Line 1 has input=9600 and output=9600 Crer) TERMINAL 1 SPEED 9600 (rer) ! Lines 2 to 20 have input and output=2400 (1) TERMINAL 00700 TERMINAL 00900 01000 TERMINAL 21 REMOTE SPEED 300(Cre) TERMINAL 22 REMOTE AUTO(rer) DEFINE NEW: PS:<NEW>,SYS: (wer) 01200 DEFINE OLD: PS:<OLD>,SYS: (i) 01300 DEFINE HLP: SYS:(re) 00800 78 (FILE) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD 00500 00600 77 | 01100 01400 01500 ! Lines ! Line 2-20 22 21 to 22-40 SPEED 40 are SPEED 2400(rer) shut 0(Crer) off(ri) is a dialup line(&r) MAGTAPE 0 24(Cmr) MAGTAPE 1 25CmD) HOMOKRO 75 VFU VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFU(ker) SYS:NORMAL.VFU(re) 01600 PRINTER 01700 PRINTER 01800 01900 02000 02100 02200 02300 PRINTER LOWERCASE RAM SYS:LP96.RAM(riT) RAM SYS:LP64.RAMrer) PRINTER TIMEZONE 5(rer) ENABLE FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION(®) (see CAUTION, ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING(rer) 6(we) BIAS below) POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 02400 02500 02600 02700 02800 CREATE 0 .,15Cw1) CREATE 1 .20(Cwe7r) CREATE 2 .40(Cr1) BATCH-CLASS 3(rti) CREATE 3 .25(wr) 02900 03000 03100 03200 03300 03400 ENABLE CLASS-SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED (k1) ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825(re) TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90(Cre) ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION(r1) TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD(ri1) CHANGE WEEKDAYS 9:00 (®er) 03500 03600 CHANGE WEEKDAYS 17:00(x1) CHANGE SATURDAY 0:00(rer )(isc) *EU (i) CAUTION -- Step 86 performance this use <can you Before your from obtain must you feature, Digital Field Service Representative the your about information following hardware. If you have a KL10-C 1. must be at revision If you have a KL10-E 2. must be at revision processor, it processor, it level level 11. 3. Dbe If you have board M7772, it must revision level E and CS revision at board have may you or level F; 3. M7786. If your hardware does not meet the above the system default, take requirements, DISABLE is, which FULL-LATENCY-OPTIMIZATION. Crs) GEND) 99 $"ecreate (directory name) ps:<operator>(ri) 100 $Spassword think-sun(®r) 101 SSUSER-GROUP 101A $SIPCF (i) 102 $$ (NUMBER) 100(xin) ) CTRLY) | (T) 103 S"ECREATE 104 $S(w) (DIRECTORY NAME) Crir) PS:<REMARKS> POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 e ESC 105 SCONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) <SUBSYS>(wir) D 106 107 SCREATE (FILE) LPFORM.INI(x1) 00100 NORMAL/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER:2(Gmn) 00200 NARROW/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER:2/WIDTH:72(G) *EUCrer) [LPFORM.INI] $ NOTE If you steps are part of in APPENDIX 109 i) 110 PAR> SHUTDOWN( rer) the E ARPA at this network, perform the time. **HALTED* * $DECSYSTEM-20 111 Set the 112 Hold NOT switch ENABLE RSX-20F register and [SYO: REDIRECTED {DX0: [DX1: MOUNTED] MOUNTED] PARFMCR 116 117 INI>DBO:(re1) D) 118 PARE MCR 119 : (R MOU> DBO MOU -- press VB14-45G 115 RUNNING 6:11 TO the to 000003 SWITCH (OCTAL). REGISTER button. 23-0CT-79 DXO0:] INI(Rer) (proceed to next step after 5 seconds) MOU(re1 ) MOUNT COMPLETE AL, 120 MOU> 121 PAR® MCR UFD(wi) 122 UFD>DB0:[5,5]Crer) 123 v ) 124 PARE MCR 125 PIP>DB0:/NV=DX0:*.* DX1:*. *Crr) { ! (Proceed to next step after } PIP(rer) 10 seconds.) POCKET 126 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 PIP>DBO: /LI(r1) DIRECTORY 17-DEC-80 DBO:[5,5] 16:36 F11ACP.TSK;1 KLDISC.TSK;1 KLRING.TSK;1 KLXFER.TSK;1 TKTN.TSK;1 MIDNIT.TSK;1 SETSPD.TSK;1 KLE.TSK;1 KLI.TSK;1 MOU.TSK;1 KLA.MCB; 231 BOOT.EXB;1 MTBOOT.EXB;1 BF16N1.Al11;1 PARSER.TSK;1 T20ACP.TSK;1 BOO.TSK;1 COP.TSK;1 DMO.TSK;1 INI.TSK;1 PIP.TSK;1 RED.TSK;1 SAV.TSK;1 UFD.TSK;1 ZAP.TSK;1 RSX20F.SYS;1 TOTAL OF 77. 5. 6. 5. 6. 4. 4. 28. 66 5. 36 60. 60. 1. 48. 8. 19. 8. 5. 23. 56. 6. 13. 9. 38. 57. 696. C C C C C C C C C C 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 C C C C C C C C C C C C BLOCKS IN 28. 16:30 16:30 16:30 16:30 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:31 16:32 16:32 16:32 16:33 16:33 16:33 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:34 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:35 16:36 FILES NOTE Systems without RP20's also have the file RSX20F.MAP on System Floppy B. This file is 142 blocks long. 127 PIP> 128 PAR¥MCE | RED(xtr 129 RED>DB(C :=SYO0 : (rer) 130 @D 131 133 PARSMCE SAV(C ) SAV>SY(: /WB(rer) 134 [DBO: [DX0: [DX1: DISMOUNTED] DISMOUNTED] DISMOUNTED] Store the floppy (Proceed disks in a to next safe step after place. 5 seconds.) POCKET INSTALLATION 134A Mount 134B G 134C PAR% MCR 134D MOU> DX 0 : Crer) { MOU 134E System MOU -- Floppy GUIDE C on FOR Drive THE DECSYSTEM-20 0. MOU (rer) MOUNT COMPLETE { (ETRL;‘ 134F PAR$MCR PIP(rer) 134G 134H PIP>DBO0:/NV=DX0:*,*(rer) PIP>DBO:/LI(rer) DIRECTORY 17-DEC-80 F11ACP.TSK;1 77. C 17-DEC-80 16:40 TKTN.TSK;1 6. C 17-DEC-80 16:41 MOU.TSK; 1 5. C 17-DEC-80 16:41 KLA.MCB; 231 36. 17-DEC-80 16:41 KLX.MCB; 231 42. 17-DEC-80 16:41 BOOT.EXB;1 60. 17-DEC-80 16:41 MTBOOT.EXB;1 BF16N1.A11;1 60. 1. 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 16:42 16:42 PARSER.TSK;1 48, C 17-DEC-80 16:42 KLDISC.TSK;1 5. C 17-DEC-80 16:42 KLRING.TSK;1 6. C 17-DEC-80 16:43 MIDNIT.TSK;1 4. C 17-DEC-80 16:43 SETSPD.TSK;1 KLE.TSK;1 4. 28. C C 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 16:43 16:43 KLI.TSK;1 66. C 17-DEC-80 16:43 T20ACP.TSK;1 BOO.TSK;1 8. 19. C C 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 16:44 16:44 COP.TSK;1 DMO.TSK; 1 8. C C 17-DEC-80 16:44 5. 17-DEC-80 16:44 INI.TSK:1 23. C 17-DEC-80 16:44 PIP.TSK;1 56. C 17-DEC-80 16:45 RED.TSK:; 1 6. C 17-DEC-80 16:45 SAV.TSK;1 13. C 17-DEC-80 16:45 UFD.TSK;1 9. C 17-DEC-80 16:45 ZAP.TSK;1 RSX20F.SYS;1 38. 57. C C 17-DEC-80 17-DEC-80 16:45 16:46 RSX20F .MAP;1 142. 17-DEC-80 16:46 TOTAL 1341 DBO:[5,5] 16:46 PIP> OF 838. BLOCKS IN 28. FILES POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 G 1349 134K I‘DAR%MCR DMO (re1) DMO>DX0 : (rer) aw) 134L 147 148 DMO> ! pAR Be sure Set the Hold the central Switch ENABLE RSX-20F Reglister and VB14-45G [SYO:REDIRECTED [DBO: MOUNTED] KLI KL10 MOS -- processor press 6:11 TO to the 1s stopped. 000007 DISK (0, 1, and 2 up). button. 23-0CT-82 DRO:] [DBO: MOUNTED] KLI -- VERSION -- ALL CACHES HARDWARE ENVIRONMENT: MASTER OSCILLATOR EXTENDED ADDRESSING INTERNAL CHANNELS CACHE KLI -- MICROCODE VERSION 231 LOADED KLI ENABLED LOGICAL 152 MEMORY ADDRESS SIZE INT TYPE 00000000 1024K 4 MA20 KLI -- AND STARTED CONFIGURATION 154 4 WRITTEN ENTER CURRENT DATE AND TIME: ENTERED WEDNESDAY, 153 FILE CONFIGURATION. CONTROLLER IS THIS CORRECT (Y,N) Y(Cxei3 NOT -- 24-0CT-79 24-OCTOBER-1979 SA{(x:) WHY RELOAD? <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS~-TABLE.BIN KLI BOOTSTRAP 1300(®i) YOU LOADED HAVE 1:00PM, FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 155 RUN N CHECKED? RUNNING DDMP SYSJOB 4(10) STARTED AT 24-0CT-79 1112 RUN SYS:ORION RUN SYS:QUASAR * %k k k %k 24-0CT-79 11:12:09 - TGHA V2 IS RUNNING FOR THE FIRST TIME. * %k %k k %k RUN SYS:MOUNTR RUN RUN SYS:INFO SYS:MAILER RUN SYS:MAPPER RUN SYS:LPTSPL RUN SYS:CDRIVE RUN SYS:SPRINT JOB 0 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA “ESET LOGIN PSEUDO “ESET LOGIN CONSOLE “ESET OPERATOR PTYCON SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO GET / 1 JOB /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA RUN SYS:BATCON / SJ SJ 0: 1: @QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR QLOG OPERATOR OPERATOR SJ O0: QENA 0: sJ JOB 1 ON TTY206 24-0CT-82 sJ SJ SJ 0: 0: 0: S"ESET LOGIN PSEUDO S$"ESET LOGIN CONSOLE S"ESET OPERATOR SJ 0: SPTYCON SJ 1: JOB SJ 1: Q@ENA 2 ON TTY207 24-0CT-82 0: PTYCON> SJ SJ 0: 1: PTYCON> SILENCE SRUN SYS:BATCON [From OPERATOR on line 210: 0: SJ 156 PTYCON> OPR(0) 0: PTYCON> W ALL OPERATOR 3 CONN OPR OPR [CONNECTED TO SUBJOB OPR(0)] Q) Installation-test System, 157 SYSTEM IN OPERATION] PTYCON.LOG.1 0: 0: 11:12:23 GET SYSTEM:PTYCON.ATO SJ 0: 11:12:22 TOPS-20 Monitor 4.1(5443) @SYSTAT OPERATOR(®i1) 0 1 2 3 DET 206 207 210 SYSJOB PTYCON BATCON OPR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR OPERATOR TI POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 ES(‘_) @ ATTACH (USER) OPERATOR (JOB #) [PSEUDO-TERMINAL, CONFIRM] PASSWORD: password(rr) your 1(wir) (rer) RE} OPR> SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALLCar) OPR> 9:35:49 --Tape DRIVE Drive STATE Status-- VOLID REQ# JOB$# 31 45 LARRUP —-———- In Use DEK Yes, Write: Yes, Unlabeled AVR: Yes, Write: Yes, Unlabeled Loaded MTA3: Unloaded MTA4 . Unloaded MTA5: Unloaded Yes AVR: No AVR: AVR: Yes TAPE-DRIVE MTAOQO: OPR> SET 162 INSTALLING 163 01Z>R> PUSH(rer) Unloaded AVR: MTA2: 161 USER --—--= —=——- Yes AVR: MTA]: -=-—-— MTAO: UNBUNDLED UNAVAILABLE(REer) SOFTWARE(Rer ) ((kL2) e MTAO0: (ri1) 164 @ASSIGN (DEVICE) 165 @ ENABLE (CAPABILITIES) (wr1) 166 S DUMPER(Cri1) 167 DUMPER> TAPE 168 Mount 169 DUMPER> REWIND( rer ) the (DEVICE) unbundled MTAQ : Crer) software tape. ESC 170 DUMPER> RESTORE (TAPE DUMPER 1, LOADING END OF TAPE # FILE(S) INTO FILES) PS:<*>* % _* <DOCUMENTS>, (TO) THURSDAY, PS:<OPERATOR>(ri1) 2-AUG-79 17:41 PS:<OPERATOR> SAVESET ESC 171 DUMPER> RESTORE DUMPER FILE(S) END OF TAPE INTO # (TAPE 1, FILES) <BINARY>, PS:<SUBSYS> SAVESET PS:<*>* *_ * THURSDAY, (TO) 2-AUG-79 PS:<SUBSYS>(re1) 17:45 LOADING POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE 173 Dismount the tape 174 Go back 175 DUMPER> EXIT(xt1) and to Step 168 FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 store it 1n a if you want to safe place. restore other software products. s 176 SDEASSIGN | (DEVICE) MTAO: (&) NOTE 156 If you performed Steps to skip Step through 176, you may now 181. 178 Installation-test System, TOPS-20 Monitor 4.1(5443) GO 179 @LOGIN (USER) OPERATOR (PASSWORD) password (ACCOUNT) F5C 180 @ENABLE 181 STAKE | | S) (&tr) (CAPABILITIE (COMMANDS FROM) <UETP.LIB>SET—UP.CMDC::) ESC 182 $CONNECT | (TO DIRECTORY) <UETP.RUN>(®e) FS(C 183 $RUN (PROGRAM) UETP.EXECxD) [12-AUGUST-79 10:42:41 User Environment Test Package] OPERATOR(x1) POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 D) 184 UETP>TAKE (COMMANDS FROM> <UETP.LIB>VERIFY.CMD(rer) UETP>ENABLE VERIFY/CYCLE:1 10:38:07 [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP>BEGIN 10:42:07 [BEGIN COMPLETED] UETP>DEFAULT/CYCLE:00:30 10:43:01 [DEFAULT UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 [ENABLE UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 COMPLETED] RANFOR [ENABLE UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 COMPLETED] RANCBL COMPLETED] MTAOQ [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP>STATUS [ 1-Nov-79 9:42:47] Depth Status Cycle RANFOR VER VER VER Cueued Enabled Enabled MTAOQ VER Enabled VERIFY RANCBL Times run Error count Error 1limit 1 0:15 0:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:15 0 0 0 Start time dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss UETP> 185 Mount a scratch 188 The following that pertain 191A BASIC(RD) COMPLETED] [ENABLE | ALGOL(xD) COMPLETED] (TEST) DBMS(ker) |ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP> ENABLE | (TEST) [ENABLE UETP> ENABLE (TEST) 10:45:08 system. (TEST) UETP> ENABLE 10:45:08 are optional. your UETP> ENABLE (TEST) 10:45:08 191 steps to [ENABLE UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 190 MTAO:, D) UETP>BEGINCR 10:45:08 189 on MTAQCrer) UETP>ENABLE 186 tape [ENABLE APL(rer) COMPLETED] FORTRACRD) COMPLETED] Perform only the steps POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-20 FSC 191B UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 (TEST) COBOL(xer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] b SC 191C 10:45:08 | (TEST) CBL74(xer) [ENABLE COMPLETED] UETP>ENABLE £SC 191D UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 | (TEST) [ENABLE UETP>BEGIN (i) 10:45:09 [BEGIN SORT(wr) COMPLETED] COMPLETE] NOTE Do all 193 not perform the tests the are following steps UETP>EXIT(wD) G5O 194 STAKE‘(COMMANDS FROM) PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD(rer) [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] [OLD] 195 End of SPOP (i) OPR> 196 until completed. <UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD.3 OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAOQ: OPR> AVAILABLEC@ APPENDIX POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE D FOR This appendix contains an example of a TOPS-20 software on a THE DECSYSTEM-2020 typical DECSYSTEM-2020. installation of the OPERATION STEP 21 Power up the 22 Typé @ruo), 23 Type @wuD), 24 Format 25 Label the disk packs. 26 Mount the disk packs. 27 Check the CONTROLLER SELECT switches. 28 Mount the 29 KS10>Ms (ReD) 30 >>UBA? 31 >>RHBASE? 32 >>TCU? 33 >>DENS? 34 >>sLv? 35 KS10>MT(rix) 36 MTBOOT> /L (ker) 37 MTBOOT> /G143(wr) the system. disk packs Installation 1f necessary. tape on MTAO:. 3 (D) 772440(wi) 0D 1600(x) o [FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TYPE non TO.ANY OF THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS. ] ' 38 DO 39 DO YOU WANT TO DEFINE THE PUBLIC STRUCTURE? YOU WANT STRUCTURE? TO REPLACE THE FILE SYSTEM ON THE YES(Crer) YES(ReT) PUBLIC POCKET INSTALLATION 40 HOW MANY 42 ON WHICH PACKS ARE GUIDE IN FOR THIS THE DECSYSTEM-2020 STRUCTURE? 2(rer) "CHANNEL, UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK #0 MOUNTED: "CHANNEL, UNIT" IS LOGICAL PACK ¥1 MOUNTED: SPACE? YESCrer) 0,0Ck) 42 ON WHICH 0,1Cw1) 44 DO YOU THE DEFAULT SWAPPING 47 DO YOU WANT THE DEFAULT FRONT-END 49 DO YOU WANT DEFAULT SIZE WANT [STRUCTURE [PS THE "PS" SUCCESSFULLY HAVE ENTERED IS THIS CORRECT WEDNESDAY, (Y,N) 24-0CT-82 RUNNING NOT FOUND-ACCOUNT SYSJOB 54 ~C EXEC MX>GET FILE MTAOQ: (k1) 56 MX>GET FILE MTAQ:(=xer) 57 MX>START(Re1) 58 SENABLE 59 SRUN INTERRUPT | | AT (again) . (CAPABILITIES)(re1) { 60 O (PROGRAM) DLUSER>LOAD ESC | MTAQ:(rer) ) (FROM FILE) MTAO: DONE. 61 DLUSER>EXIT(xt1) ESC 62 SRUN | (PROGRAM) MTAOQ:(wer) _l’.S( 63 DUMPER>TAPE ¢ (DEVICE) 12:54PM Y(re) DDMP 55 1254Crr) 24-OCTOBER-1982 DISABLED NO YESCre) wait... WHY RELOAD? INSTALLATION <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NO AREA? DEFINED] ENTER CURRENT DATE AND TIME: YOU 52 53 BOOTSTRAP YES(ke) MOUNTED] $%NO SETSPD System restarting, 51 FILE SYSTEM? MTAQ: (D) VALIDATION IS POCKET 64 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 (Esc) EsC DUMPER>RESTORE (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>* % .* (rsc) (TO) { PS:<SYSTEM>*.* *(Gwr) DUMPER TAPE #1, "NEW-SYSTEM FOR RELEASE 4.1", FRIDAY, 2-AUG-79 13:00 LOADING END 64A OF FILE(S) INTO PS:<SYSTEM> SAVESET DUMPER> "C(RreD) D) 64B sTYéE (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.BWR(ED) 64C $TY§>E (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>TOPS20.DOC () 64D $CONTINUE (rer D (rer ) 65 .* *(kir) DUMPER>RESTORE (TAPE FILES) ps:£*>*.*.* (TO) PS:<SUBSYS>* DUMPER TAPE #1, "NEW-SUBSYS FOR RELEASE 4.1", FRIDAY, 2-AUG-79 1305 END OF INTO PS:<SUBSYS> FILE(S) LOADING SAVESET (ESC) 66 DUMPER>RESTORE ESC (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>* * _* (st) (TO) PS:<UETP.LIB>* , * *(we1) DUMPER TAPE #1, "UETP FOR RELEASE 4.1" FRIDAY, 2-AUG-79 1315 LOADING FILE(S) END INTO PS:<UETP.LIB> SAVESET OF 67 DUMPER>EXIT (&) 68 SUNLOAD (DEVICE) MTAQ:(rer) (s 70 SCONNECT | (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>(xrer) ESC 71 $COPY (FROM) 2020-MONSML.EXE.l (TO) MONITR.EXE(RT) 2020-MONSML.EXE.1 =>MONITR.EXE.2;P777700 [OK] ( 72 esc ) STERMINAL | (MODE IS) NO RAISE(&Rer) POCKET INSTALLATION ESC 73 GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 ESC $COPY (FROM) TTY: => TTY: (TO) MONNAM.TXT( rer) MONNAM,TXT.1 Installation-test System(G&e) ¢2 74 $SCOPY (FROM) TTY: => TTY: (TO) TAPNAM.TXTCHT) TAPNAM.TXT.1 Instal-tst iZ 75 SCREATE Input: 76 77 78 91 92 93 94 96 97 (FILE) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD(w) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1 00100 00200 00300 00400 00500 00600 00700 00800 ; TERMINAL SPEEDS(rer) ;Line 2 has input=9600 and output=9600(xer) TERMINAL 2 SPEED 9600Cr) ;Lines 3 to 20 have input and cutput=2400Ckr) TERMINAL 3-20 SPEED 2400(rer) ;Lines 23 to 32 do not exist(rer) TERMINAL 23-42 SPEED 0Cre) ;Lines 21 and 22 are dialup lines(x1) 01200 01300 01400 DEFINE HLP: SYS:(kr) MAGTAPE 0 24 G MAGTAPE 1 25(Ck) 00900 01000 01100 TERMINAL 21-22 REMOTE SPEED 300(rer) DEFINE NEW: PS:<NEW>,SYS:(wm1) DEFINE OLD: PS:<OLD>,SYS:(rer) 01500 PRINTER LOWERCASE VFU SYS:NORMAL.VFUCk) 01600 01700 PRINTER 0 LOWERCASE TIMEZONE 5CriT) RAM SYS:LP%6.RAM(&e1) 02100 CREATE 01800 01900 02000 920 | 0 ENABLE WORKING-SET-PRELOADING(rir) BIAS 6(wer) CREATE 0 .15Cxn) 02200 02300 1 .20(x1) CREATE 2 .40(xe) BATCH-CLASS 3(rer) 02400 02500 02600 02700 02800 02900 03000 03100 03200 *EUCren) CREATE 3 .25(wi) ENABLE CLASS SCHEDULING ACCOUNTS ALLOCATED i) ARCHIVE-TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 1825 (rer) TAPE-RECYCLE-PERIOD 90 (rer) ENABLE TAPE-DRIVE-ALLOCATION(rer) TAPE-RECOGNITION-ERRORS UNLOAD(®ir) CHANGE 9:00 WEEKDAYS (ki) CHANGE 17:00 WEEKDAYS(rr1) CHANGE 0:00 SATURDAY ) [4.1-CONFIG.CMD.1] { 98 STYPE _ (FILE) PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD(rer) POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 «< 100 $AECREATE‘(DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<OPERATOR>(rer) églL;AD]SSWORD your password(rer) 101 $SUSER-GROUP 101A $$IPCFCD) 99 102 100(Rmr) RET 103 $"ECREATE 104 $$CGeD (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<REMARKS>(rer) s 105 scom\nz:c'{* (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SUBSYS>(mr) G5O 106 SCREATE | LPFORM.INI(ser) (FILE) INPUT: LPFORM.INI 00100 00200 NORMAL /BANNER: 2 /HEADER: 2/TRAILER: 2(&e1) NARROW/BANNER:2/HEADER:2/TRAILER: 2/WIDTH:72(ker) 00300 (=) *EUCe) [LPFORM.INI.1] (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM>(®r) 135 $CONNECT 136 SRUN (PROGRAM) SMFILE(Crer) DECSYSTEM-2020 DIAGNOSTICS FE-~-FILE PROGRAM VERSION 0.3, TOPS-20, KS10, CPU#=4097 [FOR HELP TYPE "HELP"] N 137 SMFILE>WRITE SETUP PS:<ROOT-DIRECTORY>BOOTSTRAP.BINCRT) 138 SMFILE>WRITE RESET(®r) 139 SMFILE>READ KS10.ULDCwD) 140 SMFILE>SERIAL nnnnn(rer) 141 SMFILE>WRITE CRAM(Rr) - 143 SMFILE>WRITE BOOT SMBOOT.EXE(ED SMFILESWRITE DONE (") 144 SMFILE>OUTPUT CRAM PS:<SYSTEM>KS10. RAM- 145 146 SMFILE>EXIT (rer ) 142 [HOME BLOCKS SET] SMFILE >OUTPUT MTBOOT SMMTBT.EXE PS: <SYSTEM>MTBOOT RDICrer) POCKET 149 150 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 G | KS10>sH(rer) 151 Press the BOOT 152 ENTER THE CURRENT YOU 153 IS 154 WHY HAVE THIS button. DATE ENTERED, CORRECT RELOAD? AND WEDNESDAY, (Y,N) 24-0CT-79 TIME: 1324(rer) 24-0OCTOBER-1979 1:24PM 1) TS(mD) <SYSTEM>ACCOUNTS-TABLE.BIN NOT FOUND - ACCOUNT VALIDATION IS DISABLED 155 RUN CHECKD? RUNNING N(Crer) DDMP SYSJOB 4(10) STARTED RUN SYS :ORION RUN AT 24-0CT-79 1325 SYS :QUASAR RUN SYS :MOUNTR RUN SYS:INFO RUN SYS:MAILER RUN SYS:MAPPER RUN SYS:LPTSPL RUN SYS:CDRIVE JOB 0 /LOG OPERATOR XX OPERATOR ENA "ESET LOGINS ANY “"ESEND * SYSTEM IN OPERATION “ESET OPERATOR PTYCON <SYSTEM>PTYCON.ATO GET 0: 0: 0: Installation-test System, @LOG OPERATOR OPERATOR 0: JOB 1 ON TTY46 24-0CT-79 SJ sJ sJ SJ sJ SJ sJ sJ SJ 156 oo ve e SJ 4.1(5443) 13:25:25 IN OPERATION] @ENA S"ESET LOGINS ANY S"ESEND * SYSTEM PTYCON> PTYCON IN OPERATION GET SYSTEM:PTYCON,ATO SILENCE SRUN SYS:BATCON PTYCON.LOG.1 PTYCON> W ALL OPR (0) PTYCON> 3 OPERATOR CONN [CONNECTED OPR TI OPR TO SU BJOB OPR(0)] w9 | I nstallation-test System, TOPS-20 @SYSTAT OPERATOR(Cker) WN=O 157 Monitor SPTYCON e SJ sJ es COOOOMODOOODOO [From OPERATOR:SYSTEM TOPS-20 DET SYSJOB 206 PTYCON OPERATOR OPERATOR 207 210 BATCON OPERATOR OPR OPERATOR Monitor 4.1(5443) :0: POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE =) FOR THE | 158 @ATTACH (USER) OPERATOR (JOB #) [PSEUDO-TERMINAL, CONFIRM]Cxr) 159 PASSWORD : your DECSYSTEM-2020 1(®D) password(rer) RET OPR>SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE /ALLCxe) OPR> 9:35:4¢ STATE MTAQ: Unloaded AVR: Yes In Use AVR: Yes, MTAl: MTA2: Loaded AVR: Yes, DEK Write: 31 Yes, LARRUP 45 Unlabeled Write: Yes, Unlabeled Unloaded MTA3: AVR: Yes Unloaded MTA4: AVR: No Unloaded MTAS: AVR: 161 162 Tape Drive Status-USER JOB# REQ# VOLID DRIVE Yes OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTA0: UNAVAILABLE(CRT) INSTALLING UNBUNDLED SOFTWARE(rer) ?flflb “z 163 OPR> PUSH(xeT) 164 @ASSIGN (DEVICE) 165 @ENABLE 166 SDUMPER (rer) | MTAO:(wer) (CAPABILITIES) (ESC) 167 DUMPER> TAPE (DEVICE) 168 Mount 169 DUMPER> REWINDCriT) the distribution MTAO:Crer) tape. Cesc) Cesc) 170 } DUMPER> RESTORE (TAPE FILES) DUMPER TAPE # 1, LOADING END OF FILE(S) SAVESET % % (TO) PS:(*>* <DOCUMENTS>, THURSDAY, INTO PS:<OPERATOR> PS:<OPERATOR>(®1) 2-AUG-79 17:41 POCKET 171 INSTALLATION GUIDE DUMPER>RESTORE DUMPER TAPE LOADING END OF # { (TAPE 1, FILE(S) FOR THE FILES) <BINARY>, INTO DECSYSTEM-2020 PS:<*>*_ * % THURSDAY, (TO) PS:<SUBSYS>(xir) 2-AUG-79 17:45 PS:<SUBSYS> SAVESET 173 Dismount the 174 Go to 175 DUMPER>EXI (i) T 176 $SDEASSIGN back | tape Step and 168 (DEVICE) store if it 1in you want a to safe place. restore other software products. MTAO: (k) NOTE If you performed Steps to Step 181. 156 through 176, you may now skip 178 I nstallation-test System, CEsc ) 179 @LOGIN 180 @ENABLE 181 STAKE 182 183 | Monitor s (USER) | TOPS-20 OPERATOR | 4.1(5443) s) (PASSWORD) password | (ACCOUNT) (CAPABILITIES)(x1) (COMMANDS FROM) <UETP.LIB>SET-UP.CMD(wr) SCONNECT‘(TO DIRECTORY) <UETP.RUN>(CmD) | SRUN (PROGRAM) UETP.EXE [12-AUGUST-79 10:42:41 User Environment Test Package] OPERATOR(Re1) POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 UETP)TAKE‘(COMMANDS FROM) <UETP.LIB>VERIFY.CMD( ) 184 UETP>ENABLE VERIFY/CYCLE:1(wr) 10:38:07 [ENABLE UETP>BEGINCr) COMPLETED] 10:42:07 [BEGIN COMPLETED] UETP>DEFAULT/CYCLE:00:30 10:43:01 [DEFAULT UETP>ENABLE 10:43:07 [ENABLE UETP>ENABLE COMPLETED] RANFOR 10:43:07 [ENABLE UETP>ENABLE MTAOQO 10:43:07 COMPLETED] RANCBL [ENABLE COMPLETED] COMPLETED] UETP>STATUS [ 1-NOV~-79 Test 9:42:47] Depth Status Cycle VER VER Queued Enabled 1 0:15 0:15 0:15 name —— Times run Error count Error limit 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start time e v VERIFY RANCBL RANFOR MTAQ VER VER Enabled Enabled 0 0 0 0 dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss 0 0 UETP> 185 Mount & scratch 186 UETP>BEGINCR) tape on MTAN:. MTA0CRD) UETP>ENABLE The following steps are optional. that pertain to your system. 188 SN (TEST) UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 |ENABLE _ BASIC(xer) COMPLETED] (CEsc) 189 UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 190 UETP>ENABLE 10:45:08 191 192 UETP>BEGIN 10:45:09 } (TEST) [ENABLE UETP>EMABLE 10:45:08 (TEST) [ENABLE (TEST) [ENABLE ALGOL(Rr) COMPLETED) DBMS(&rtr) COMPLETED] APL(xi1) COMPLETED] (UETP RUN AFTER) (rer) [BEGIN COMPLETED] Perform only the steps POCKET INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DECSYSTEM-2020 NOTE Do not perform the following tests are 193 UETP>EXIT(Rer) 194 $STAKE | 195 of <UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD.3 $POP(ren) OPR> 196 Start until all (COMMANDS FROM) PS:<UETP.LIB>CLEAN-UP.CMD(&er) [OLD] End steps completed. timesharing. the APPENDIX TAILORING Perform the steps YOUR SYSTEM E FOR ARPANET in this appendix only if you the ARPA PS:<SYSTEM> *and wusing are network. At this point you have mp Step 1: installed Give the Command: Press the RETURN the ARPANET software. CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) Key. the to If you are part of the ARPA network, you must add a parameter Type CONNECT and press the ESC key. f1ile. PS:<SYSTEM>4-1-CONFIG.CMD the press and PS:<SYSTEM> Type The system prints (TO DIRECTORY). RETURN key. SCONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) PS:<SYSTEM> (Cker) $ l"Step 2: Give the Command: RETURN Key. EDIT (FILE) 4-1-CONFIG.CMD and Press the If you are using the ARPA network you must set up a HOST number in the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file. Type EDIT and press the ESC key. The system Type 4-1-CONFIG.CMD and press the RETURN key. prints (FILE). ESC SEDIT E.1 ! (FILE) DEFINING THE 4-1-CONFIG.CMD(rr) HOST NUMBER You should have received a HOST number from ARPA when you were gilven permission to connect to the ARPANET. TIf you do not know your HOST number, you may get it by phoning the ARPANET Network Control Center at BB&N. The format for the HOST command is: HOST octal-host—-number TAILORING »Step 3: YOUR SYSTEM Give the Edit Command: To insert the HOST command the of number the then FOR ARPANET I Line Number. Press the RETURN Key. into the 4-1-CONFIG.CMD file, type I and at which you want to insert the HOST 1line command. *72150Crer) * »St.ep 4: Type the HOST Number. Type HOST followed by the OCTAL-HOST-NUMBER and press the RETURN key. HOST 45(xer) 02150 * mp Step 5: Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. Type EU and press the RETURN key to save the file without 1line numbers. The system prints the file specification and the $ prompt. *E U (wer 5 [4-1-CONFIG.CMD.1] $ E.1.1 The Entering the Host Number, Name, following information must be and Other Pertinent Information entered 1into a file named HSTNAM,TXT: The 1. Host number 2. Host name 3. System 4, Flags 5. NEW format for type the command is: NNN,SSSS,TT,Fl,...,Fn Where: NNN is the SSSSS is TT is the types are: system host the name -- or 1n octal. string. system type type TENEX number spelled out. (A null string means no some version of BBN-Tenex or insufficient representation.) Systems running TOPS-20. System running a version of ITS. System running DECsystem-10. ITS DEC --- TIP -- a MTIP -- Magtape ANTS -— some TIP. TIP. ANTS. ELF -- ELF operating MULTICS -- MULTICS E-2 system for PDP-11. Current valid TAILORING Fl,...,Fn are USER SERVER -~ —— YOUR flags, -- as FOR ARPANET follows: Doesn't run Server TELNET. Runs some type of Server TELNET and/or nickname SYSTEM This is on Sockets 1 27(8). another name you can give for the host. NEW —-—- Uses new network protocol (RAR/RAS, etc). NOTE The following section shows you edit the file HSTNAM.TXT, to how to include information that pertains to your own system. A version of HSTNAM.TXT 1is included with every new DECSYSTEM-20 and DECSYSTEM-2020. However, to be sure of using the most up-to-date version, you should use the FTP program to copy the file, <SYSTEM>HOST-NAME/DESCRIPTOR-FILE. TXT from node network. SRI-KA Copy this of file " PS:<SYSTEM>HSTNAM.TXT. with I’Euep 6: 6 below. Give the Command: EDIT RETURN Step the into Then (FILE) ARPANET the file, proceed HSTNAM.TXT and Press the Key. You must enter your Host number, Host name, and other pertinent information into the file HSTNAM.TXT. Type EDIT and press the ESC key. The system prints (FILE). Type HSTNAM.TXT and press the RETURN key. The system prints the name of the file being edited, the generation SEDIT EDIT: number, ¢ (FILE) and the EDIT prompt. HSTNAM.TXT (wr) HSTNAM.TXT.1 * .Step 7: Give the EDIT Command: I Line Number and Press the RETURN Key. To inform the EDIT program where to then the 1line number vyou have information. Press the RETURN key. you The entered. following is an insert the information, chosen 1in which to The system prints the type I and place the line number example: *T150CRe) 00150 mpStep 8: Type the example. Type the Information for Your System. information for You must enter 00150 * your system. The following 1is Jjust the information pertaining to your system. (ki) 145,DEC-MARLBORO,TENEX,SERVER,USER,NEW an TAILORING YOUR SYSTEM FOR ARPANET NOTE The previous example assumes that the line number you selected was between two exlsting 1line numbers. If the 1line number you selected was at the end of the file, the system will print another line number. If the latter 1s the case, mpStep 9: To end press the next step. ESC key and continue at the Type EU and Press the RETURN Key. the EDIT EU and press and the TOPS-20 program the and RETURN enabled save key. the file without The system prints line numbers, the name of the prompt. * EUGD [HSTNAM.TXT. 2] S NOTE Proceed Front-end at Chapter 4 DECSYSTEM-2020. System) (Creating 1f you the a DECSYSTEM-20, or Chapter 5 (Creating the Microprocessor File System), 1f you have a File have type file APPENDIX F USING THE STAND-ALONE DISK FORMATTER F.1 [DECSYSTEM-2020 ONLY] INTRODUCTION KSFORM is designed to run stand-alone on any DECSYSTEM-2020 (KS10 CPU) an RH11 through connected drives, disk RMO3 and/or RP06 using easy-to-use yet flexible a provide It is designed to controller. The program will and RMO3 disk packs. RP06 for formatting program can be format disk packs on up to 11 drives, the maximum number that The program is organized so that the connected to an RH11 controller. formatting of packs on all selected drives begins at the same time. The disks are formatted in 18-bit mode (i.e., -10 format, same as -20 format). F.2 LOADING .Step 1: PRCCEDURE Mount the tape containing the KSFORM program on a tape drive. for help. bringing »Step 2: After ’Step 3: Type MT(wr) F.3 (Contrcl-backslash) . PROGRAM-OPERATOR has KSFORM interaction. variety of The refer to Section 2.2, Step 28, of this manual necessary, If tape the on line, () type at the CTY to get the KS10> prompt. The program starts automatically. INTERACTION user of amount minimal a require to designed been a description of all user dialog under a is Following conditions. program prints: 1. "MODIFY ANY CONTROLLER ADDRESS PARAMETERS? Typing "N" to this qguestion will cause the standard addresses, which are: UBA # 1 RH ADDR 776700 INTERRUPT VECTOR Y,N OR ? the program to - " access 254 Typing "Y" is required if you wish to format drives accessed The program will question you as to other address. some at the desired addresses. USING THE STAND-ALONE DISK FORMATTER This 1s require a one-time question, program reload. "DO WANT YOU The TO program has configuration, like to format type FORMAT and PACKS? polled and any listed of the [DECSYSTEM-2020 any further Y,NOR all ? - ONLY] changes will " drives in the their current status. on-line drives listed, system If you would vyou should "Y". Typing "N" " starting will cause address the program to jump back to the and halt. The program may be asked after each batch of disk program continued by typing "CO" (i), This question is packs is "H" FOR containing an formatted. "WHAT THE DRIVE(S) COMPLETE TO BE FORMATTED? LIST OF POSSIBLE (TYPE 00 TO 77, OR COMMANDS.)" * or "what If drive you #'s type -" "H"(®x1) explanation of all printed. The options Delete PXX Program-write-lock PALL Program-write-lock to this XX to the test list. drive XX from the test drive EXX Select XX,YY, 722 Select drives XX,YY,ZZ. drive SELECT Print summary LOCKED Print summary SAME Select DDT Enter DDT. H Print this then RM03s YOU WANT 2 - you that and TO operator-selected drives. help that software (program) must write-enable it before the program does not support it can be formatting RP06s MAPOUT if message. in the SOFT a drive same is operation. (RECOVERABLE) ERROR SPOTS? Y,N " Typing "Y" that have will cause of the "N" the created non-recoverable) Typing XX. of write-locked drives. drives reported by SELECT. same notified of is list. XX only question, XX. all drives. Program-write—-enable all drives, Program-write—enable drive XX. both area drive nmessage, responses Add are "DO OR HELP DXX write locked formatted, and of a AXX WEALL You , possible are: to be locations read errors written into of all areas (both the BAT of the pack recoverable block (bad and block) pack. will cause only the locations have created hard (non-recoverable) onto the block area. BAT read on the errors to pack be that written USING 5. THE STAND-ALONE DISK "PRINT SYSTEM TOTALS? FORMATTER [DECSYSTEM-2020 Y,N OR ? - " ONLY] Typing "Y" Wiil cause fifie system totals to be printed. The_systém totals are an itemized.list'of statistics: a.; Numbéf of bits XFERFD; read and written. b. Numbér of t:ansfer and positioning errors. c. Numbef of MBC errors detected. Typing "N" will accumulate the totals but not print them. F.4 CONFIGURING THE DRIVES After program'initialiiation, the configuration routine 1is called. This routine performs an initial diagnostic check on the UBA and RH1l. It ensures that the enable transfer bit in the UBA can be set cleared with a UBA INIT, and that all IP channels can be cleared. drive select register, RHCS2, is tested to ensure that none of select bits are stuck either on or off. If any of these checks fail, the program halts. The program then proceéds to operator The The the drives and reports to the the present status of all drives in the system configuration. status report includes the following: 1. Drive type 2. Seriéi"numbéf. 3. If 4. 1If the drive is presently write locked 5. 1If fihe pack is software write protected 6. If 7. If the drive 8. If évailable, the serial number where formatted the drive the drive program formatted will (that unknown). F.5 poll and The the Pack is on line is single or dual ported 1s -10 formatted or recognize only in unknown -l0-formatted format packs as already formatted, program is, -11(16-bit mode)-formatted packs are reported as recognition is done with zero drive offset. PROGRAM DESCRIPTION If you have gntered vélid control ©passes the packs. disk to PAKINT, The PAKINT routine will blocks for minimizes the the drive numbers automatically selected to be the routine that directs the formatting of RP06 necessary dialog, so or as format, RM0O3 to map, disk avolid and create drives. user errors. the BAT The script USING THE STAND-ALONE DISK FORMATTER [DECSYSTEM-2020 ONLY] The PAKINT routine directs the formatting operation by major task routines - FORMAT, RONLY, and MAPOUT. FORMAT - routine to format RP06 or RM03 disk calling packs in three PDP-10 mode The first of these routines to be called is FORMAT, which provides the facilities for formatting in 18-bit (PDP-10) mode. The operator is notified as to when the formatting begins with the message "FORMAT" and the current runtime. Formatting is done on a track-by-track basis (that is, an individual sector cannot be processed, but only the entire track). The formatting of all selected packs is done at the same time. Twenty errors are allowed on each pack, only five of which may be hard 000, surface 00 of each pack may not have any hard Cylinder errors., errors. Each area on the pack is formatted with header and worst-case information. This data is written to the pack with 0 offset. data When all selected packs have been formatted, you are notified with the message "OPERATION COMPLETED" and the current runtime. RONLY routine to perform a read-only verify - a on formatted pack The PAKINT routine then transfers control to the RONLY subroutine, which is designed to read all areas of each pack. The routine acknowledges only errors detected by the ECC 1logic (that 1is, no write-transfer or data-compare code is executed). Any error corrected by the ECC logic is reported, as well as those ECC correction attempts that fail. Again, you are notified when the operation begins and when it ends. MAPOUT - routine to report the BAT block contents and write After the pack them on is verified the pack by the RONLY routine, to control the passes user to MAPOUT, the hard-data-error-spot identifier. This routine will report the pack BAT block contents and update the pack BAT block area. MAPOUT works in conjunction with several other routines that are responsible for generating the BAT block entry word and putting this entry into the drive's BAT block area, writing the drive's BAT block area onto the pack, and generating the BAT block area for the drive in memory. F.6 All PROGRAM ERROR MESSAGES program messages are intended to notify you as to current program 1is program the interaction with no that Remember inactivity. required, other than answering the questions discussed in Section F.3 even in the case of true 1is This Interaction). (Program-Operator program error. USING THE STAND-ALONE DISK FORMATTER [DECSYSTEM-2020 ONLY] There are two basic types of errors that can These occur in program. the are: 1. 1In the case Fatal errors, which terminate program operation. fatal error, the program prints a message describing a of a possible cause, and returns to the starting address. restart the program by typing "CO" (). You may system Errors cf this type may indicate a problem within the If vyou are formatting several packs, try ©packs. disk or formatting only half of them, to isolate the damaged packs. If fatal errors occur repeatedly using diferent packs, notify your DIGITAL Field Service Representative. 2. Errors that the program will attempt to recover from continue. There are several types of errors from which the program : and may For example, up to 20 recoverable and 5 be able to recover. non-recoverable transfer errors per disk pack are considered acceptable (although cylinder 00, surface 00 may not have any You are notified when the error non-recoverable errors). additional information concerning given be may and occurs, the error. the of Usually, you are also notified of the resolution problem. Tt is a recoverable error if one of the selected disk drives The program will continue to goes off line for some reason. If there are no other drives. selected other format all the program will ask you to select some selected drives, drives. are to be Some errors, especially soft, easily recoverable errors, Since all information on the pack has been written using expected. the same drive (with the exception of the initial reading of the HOME and BAT blocks on the pack), retry is always done with zero offset. The retry procedure is as follows: 1interrupt 5 1in channel All non-fatal drive errors processed routines reguest error recovery. The error recovery 1s initiated Once the recovery procedure at interrupt level and is automatic. is initiated, all other data transfers and positioning operations are inhibited until its completion. All positioning operations are limited drive 1is recalibrated before each retry. to three retries. The Write header and data commands are also limited to three retries. is reissued at zero drive offset and examined for The command errors. READ/WRITE commands are retried seven times at zero offset. APPENDIX GENERATING G.1 A TAILORED BATCH G AND SPOOLING SYSTEM INTRODUCTION This appendix shcws you how to generate a TOPS-20 batch and spooliling (GALAXY) system specifically tailored for your installation. To do this you must have already installed a standard Release 4.2 GALAXY system. The standard GALAXY system is satisfactory for most sites. The procedures shown in Chapters 1 through 8 of this manual, or 1in Appendix A or B, show you how to install including a standard Release 4.2 GALAXY those procedures, vyou may use the steps to generate standard a GALAXY system having Release 4.1 TOPS-20 system. After 1n this appendix different parameters software, performing 1f you need from the one. NOTE While the Release steps 4.2 in generating GALAXY system a can tailored be used with timesharing users logged 1n, the critical phase of stopping the standard Release 4.2 system and starting up your tallored one (Steps 29-56) should, for safety reasons, be performed on a stand-alone system. The gueues need not be empty, however, as long as a Release 4.2 (as opposed to Release 4.0 or earlier) GALAXY system is already running. The following starting up the section. Run the DUMPER program to transfer the GALAXY source files from the TOPS-20 bundled system software tape (also called the TOPS-20 Distribution tape) to a disk directory. This directory 1s referred to as the build area. 1In addition to the source code, this directory contains a special batch control 2. next file called GALAXY.CTL. Run the GALGEN program to create a file GALAXY system parameters. The name of GALCNF.MAC. | 1. in H shown the procedure for generating and The actual steps you would perform ] are paragraphs summarize a new GALAXY system. <contalning the new the parameter file 1is GENERATING Submit the A TAILORED control BATCH file AND SPOOLING GALAXY.CTL to your SYSTEM currently running batch system. The batch job that is created by GALAXY.CTL reads the parameter file created by GALGEN and generates a new set of GALAXY files of type .EXE in a temporary area. The batch job will create a log file that should be saved for reference, at 1least until is correctly operating. Stop all system the components (QUASAR, LPTSPL, the of new the batch and currently spooling system running GALAXY area (usually etc.). Copy all old GALAXY files SYS:) to some other area. Copy all new GALAXY files Start up the components from their from the temporary the new GALAXY of current area to SYS:. system. When you are sure that the new GALAXY system 1is operating correctly, vyou may delete the .EXE files of the o0ld system. If you want to be cautious, you may save the old .EXE files on tape. You may also delete the GALAXY source files (and the wunrelated files restored along with them from the Distribution tape) from the build area. However, if your installation can spare the disk space, it is more convenient to leave the sources on disk. Then, if any code patches must be made to the batch system, you will have the sources readily available. Otherwise, you will have to restore the sources from the software tape if patching is required. NOTE The procedures that you have described a Release system currently procedures can be normal timesharing. G.2. RESTORING THE GALAXY below assume 4.1 GALAXY running. carried out These during FILES NOTE Those procedures assume that you using the console terminal (CTY) and attached to the system PTYCON job. »Step 1: To Give the Command: find WHAT ALL and Press the are are RETURN Key. out which PTYCON subjob is running the OPR program, give the command, WHAT ALL and press the RETURN key. The system responds with a list of PTYCON subjobs, followed by the PTYCON> PTYCON prompt. PTYCON>WHAT ALLCwr) GENERATING mp Step 2: A TAILORED Give the Command: BATCH CONNECT AND SPOOLING (TO SUBJOB) SYSTEM 0 and Press the RETURN Key. To connect to press the ESC the RETURN the subjob running the OPR program, key. The system prints (TO SUBJOB). key. The system prints the OPR type CONNECT and Type OPR and press prompt. ESC PTYCON>CONNECT | (TO SUBJOB) OPR (i) OPR> mp Step 3: Give the Command: RETURN SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE To find out which tape drives are not in use, TAPE-DRIVE command and press the RETURN key. a list of tape and Press the Key. drives and their give the SHOW STATUS The system responds with status. OPR>SHOW STATUS TAPE-DRIVE(ri1) ’Step 4: Give the Command: Press the RETURN SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: UNAVAILABLE and Key. To allow the use of a tape drive without the 1intervention of the MOUNTR program, give the command, SET TAPE-DRIVE and lnsert the number of a tape drive that 1s not presently in use (MTAQ: is only an example). Type UNAVAILABLE and press the RETURN key. The system prints, Enter Text and Terminate with "Z. OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE Enter Text Error: ERROR: mp Step 5: the UNAVAILABLE (ki) and Terminate with "2 If you see an error message similar to ?Tape drive allocation is not enabled, your site does not have tape drive allocation enabled. Therefore, you do not have to set any drives unavailable. Skip to Step 6. Type USING GALGEN PROCEDURE “Z. To give a GALGEN MTAQ: reason for PROCEDURE OPR> setting a and tape prompt. Enter Text and Terminate with | USING GALGEN PROCEDURE "% OPR> drive type a CTRL/Z. "% unavailable, enter USING The system prints "Z and gives GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING »Step 6: Type SYSTEM Type PUSH and Press the RETURN Key. PUSH to move to another level and press the RETURN key. OPR>PUSH(xe1) @ ’Step 7: Type ASSIGN MTAO: Assign to your @ASSIGN and Press the RETURN Key. job the tape drive that you set unavailable in Step 4. MTAQ: (®r) @ NOTE The examples in this manual show MTAO: as the tape drive used to restore files from the Distribution tape. However, you may assign and use any tape drive. Be sure to use the name of the tape drive you assign in this step whenever MTAO: appears in this appendix. ’Step 8: Type ENABLE and Press the RETURN Key. @ENABLE (re1) $ I’»Step 9: Give the Command: Press the RETURN “ECREATE (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<BUILD> and Key. Create a directory to which to hold the GALAXY source files. Although you may glve it any name, a reasonable name for this directory is PS:<BUILD>, because it is also known as the build area. Type CTRL/E CREATE and press Type PS:<BUILD> and the subcommand R { the ESC key. The system prints (DIRECTORY NAME). press the RETURN key. The system prints [NEW] and prompt (SS). Crs) S"ECKEATE (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<BUILD> (we1) [NEW] $$ G-4 GENERATING mp Step 10: the the sufficient entire complete the RETURN storage fourth save command with $ WORKING $ TAILORED BATCH Give the Subcommands: Press Assign A AND SPOOLING SYSTEM WORKING 3000 and PERMANENT 3000 and Key. space set a to the (not final directory Jjust the carriage to allow GALAXY copying of sources). Then Distribution tape return. 3000 Cren) PERMANENT 3000(Rr) s Cur) $ I’*Step 11: To Mount the Distribution Tape on MTAO:. restore (the assigned refer to will from the GALAXY files bundled in Step Chapter Bp Step 12: You the TOPS-20 7. 2, from system If you Section tape, mount software need 2.1, the tape) on the tape drive help mounting the Distribution Step 9, of this manual. you tape, Type DUMPER and Press the RETURN Key. need the tape. DUMPER Type DUMPER> program DUMPER and to press restore the the RETURN GALAXY key. The source files system prints prompt. $SDUMPER(x1) DUMPER> l’>Step 13: Give the Command: TAPE (DEVICE) MTAO: and Press the RETURN Key. To and the tell the (MTAO: the DUMPER press the tape drive 1s only DUMPER> program ESC key. on which an which tape The system you mounted example). Press drive you are using, type TAPE prints (DEVICE). the Distribution Type the name tape in Step the The RETURN key. system of 16 prints prompt. DUMPER> TAPE | (DEVICE) MTAQ: DUMPER> mpStep 14: To over save sets on the save RETURN set it DUMPER> DUMPER the prompt. positions DUMPER> SKIF DUMPER> first the three SKIP 4 and Press the RETURN Key. the command SKIP 3 and press prints a message identifying each the skip Give the Command: Be tape. 4(ri1) prepared for the a 5- Distribution tape, give key. The DUMPER program skips, and then gives to 10-minute wait while GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM wp Step 15: Give the Command: PS:<BUILD>*.* * and RESTORE To restore all the files from Press (TAPE the set save fourth the PS:<*>*.*.* FILES) (TO) RETURN Key. (including the The system source files), type RESTORE and press the ESC key. prints system The ESC. press and Type PS: (TAPE FILES). GALAXY prints The system prints press ESC. and PS:<BUILD> Type ., ok x (TO) <kH*x The system prints a message identifying Press the RETURN key. * % *_ Be then the message, Loading file(s) 1nto PS:<BUILD>. and tape the this message prepared for a wait of approximately 10 minutes between and the next DUMPER> prompt. *x _* (TO) PS:<BUILD> *,* *(r1) (TAPE FILES) PS:<*>* DUMPER>RESTORE If DUMPER does not print a message identifying the save Error: ERROR: set as "Language Sources for TOPS-20 V4.1", the tape 1is Give the set. save correct the at positioned not REWIND command to DUMPER and begin again at Step 14. Error: ERROR: If the message, Loading files into PS:<BUILD>, does not Be sure appear, no files are being restored from tape. the correct tape is mounted on the tape drive you that Then begin again at Step 9. have assigned to your job. persist, the tape may be bad. errors If DIGITAL Representative for assistance. mpStep 16: Give the DUMPER Commands: Contact your REWIND and EXIT. tape the Once the fifth save set has been restored from tape, rewind the press and REWIND, command, DUMPER the Give DUMPER. from exit and the Give The DUMPER program prints the DUMPER> prompt. RETURN key. DUMPER. program finishes, and the system The EXIT. command DUMPER prints the TOPS-20 enabled prompt (S). DUMPER>REWIND( rer) DUMPER>EXIT(®i1) $ mpStep 17: Give the DIRECTORY) Command: PS:<BUILD> INFORMATION and Press (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE the RETURN Key. (OF save fourth the To verify that you have restored all the files from the TOPS-20 Distribution tape, type INFO and press the ESCAPE of set key; ESCAPE the system prints RMATION key; system the (ABOUT). prints PS:<BUILD> and press the RETURN key. Type K-USAGE The (OF DIS system prints about the amount of disk space used by the directory. (ABOUT) DISK-USAGE (OF DIRECTORY) PS:<BUILD> 2865 Pages assigned 7971 Pages free 3000 Working, $ press 3000 Permanent pages allowed on PS: the Type information Ces) C%C) SINFORMATION and DIRECTORY). PS:<BUILD>(ker) GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND B Step 18: SPOOLING SYSTEM STOP. the approximately match not does assigned If the number of pages in this manual, you may not have restored all the files shown number Check to be sure you necessary for creating a tailored GALAXY system. have the correct tape mounted, then begin again at Step 12. Give the Commands: I"Step 19: (DEVICE) and MTAO: UNLOAD Press the (DEVICE) and MTAOQ: RETURN Key. DEASSIGN Once the GALAXY source files have been restored from the Distribution tape, you should unload the tape and return the tape drive to the pool the key; ESC the press and Type UNLOAD of available resources. (or the name of the tape drive on Type MTAO: system prints (DEVICE). the and press 11) Step which you mounted the Distribution tape in Type The system prints the TOPS-20 enabled prompt ($). key. RETURN the DEASSIGN and press the ESC key; press and MTAOQ: enabled key. RETURN the system The prints (DEVICE). Type system prints the TOPS-20 prompt. ESC SUNLOAD { (DEVICE) $DEASSIGN { MTAO: (&) (DEVICE) _ MTAO:(r1) $ you If You can now remove the Distribution Tape from the tape drive. need help, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.7, Step 68 of this manual. mp Step 20: STOP. If in Step 4 you set unavailable the tape drive you used, make it Otherwise, m) Step 21: again available skip to Step 24. to timesharing users: you should go on to Step 21. Type PCP and Press the RETURN Key. control of To return the tape drive to the pool of tape drives under Type POP the MOUNTR program, you must return to the previous level. and press the RETURN key. The system prints the OPR> prompt. $POP(wer) OPR> l.'Step 22: Give the Command: the RETURN SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAO: AVAILABLE and Press Key. OPR>SET TAPE-DRIVE MTAQO: AVAILABLE(xm) OPR> »Step 23: Give the Command: OPR> PUSH( &1 ) $ PUSH and Press the RETURN Key. GENERATING A TAILORED mp Step 23A: Give the Command: Press Before Type running CON the and DIRECTORY). prompt the RETURN GALGEN press Type BATCH AND CONNECT SPOOLING (TO SYSTEM DIRECTORY) PS:<BUILD> and Key. program the you ESCAPE must Key. press connect The PS:<BUILD> and the DIRECTORY) PS:<BUILD> (R to system RETURN PS:<BUILD>. returns Key. NECT The (TO system returns. ) Crs SCONNECT (TO $ G.3 RUNNING I’Efiep 24: Ycu must file THE GALGEN PROGRAM Type GALGEN and Press the RETURN Key. run the GALGEN program PS:<BUILD>GALCNF.MAC, describing and press name and the tailored the RETURN version GALAXY key. number, to create which system The and the will you GALGEN then GALAXY contaln are configuration the building. program printing responds several parameters Type by GALGEN giving its paragraphs of information. SGALGEN(rer) GALGEN Version [Starting [Writing In the GALAXY GALAXY line of Generation Procedure Configuration following Text The 4(2032) dialog, question starts with all (List the File questions or range actual text the guestion 1s a description of the parentheses. This description might list of keywords, or a textual description is The default will You have the the default be choice assumed of explanation of each SHORT 1n which the dialog GALAXY Answer the SHORT (for text following a short 1f by 1s guestion one). a Dialog Length (SHORT,LONG) a answers) of the form: [Default question. in press LONG that either [SHORT] the answer] Followlng LONG pressing brackets. RETURN Key. dialog 1in which you either square the ©provided In SHORT. of of question Simply System] possible answers enclosed in be a range of numbers, a description. Following this 1is assumed typing are only on procedure. TOPS20 enclosed you carrying generation obtain the help any question. answer, question it for PS:<BUILD>GALCNF.MAC.3] or are with familiar case, mark (for the an automatically, (?) a you in long RETURN can a always response to dialog) or key implies GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM mp Step 25: STOP. the You have the option of a long dialog, in which GALGEN explains short one, in which only the choices or a it offers you, choices GALGEN, of If you are an experilenced user themselves are displayed. press case, this in faster: is which dialog, short the want may you the RETURN key and ‘Step 26: skip to Step 35. Type LONG and Press the RETURN key. To request the long dialog with GALGEN, type LONG and press the RETURN the first then information and some GALGEN responds with key. question l’»Step 27: about GALGEN parameters. Answer the Questions in the GALGEN Display. ¢to you for time, a GALGEN presents a series of questions, one at If you asked for a long dialog in Step 26, an explanation of answer. the vyou will see only Otherwise, 1included. 1is each question default The answer. default the and choices, of range the guestions, This value will be answer is the one that appears in brackets ([]). used if you answer the question by pressing the RETURN key. Below is a sample of the dialog you would see if you typed LONG in Press the RETURN key when you want to see the next question Step 26. in the GALGEN dialog. NOTE You must your own supply the correct values for system. Administrative Controls and Parameters GALAXY absolute determine The questions in this section which cannot be overridden by user or operator controls. parameters 1in the file in a disk interactions The system logs all operator answer to the following question specifies the Your area. spooling name to be used for this file. Operator log filename(3-20 Characters) [OPERATOR-SYSTEM] (xe1 ) reguests spooling and batch Users can specify a priority for their The allowable values on this parameter switch. /PRIORITY the with the (representing 63 and lowest priority) (represanting range 1 The two gquestions relate to this switch. The following highest). first question requests the maximum priority that may be specified by a non-privileged user. Maximum priority non-privileged users may specify(10-63) [20] Cri) You may specify the value to be used if the user does not specify a This value must be between 1 and the maximum that /PRIORITY switch. you specified in the previous question. Default for /PRIORITY on batch and spooling reqguests(1-63) [10) (win) GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM Applications The following section supported by accessible through You can GALAXY enable establishes parameters (for example, NCP). the operator interface. through vyour OPR, applications for These applications applications answers to the will be following questions. Will you be running Each application (for example,NCPTAB). Application applications? (YES,NO) must name or be associated carriage The questions the wvarious in this options with return Batch to Job an (k) application exit(1-20 table name characters) Defaults section are used that user can a [YES] to define default values for specify when submitting a batch job. The batch the user /TIME default will Default batch Every can specify switch. batch be If job job runtime has Line printer Card punch output Paper tape punch The user can after SUBMIT command. log file, output for the batch limits whether Jjob The to for for his this batch switch, Seconds) each pages) cards) 1imit(0-5000 1imit(0-5000 NOLOG (5-9999 1imit(0-9999 log file only i1f the doesn't specify this Default runtime specify Jjob the using following [300] (x1) type of spooled output. by the batch user with appropriate switches to the user doesn't specify these switches, the be used: 1imit(0-99999 specify printed not limit maximum output output maximum does used: These limits can be set the SUBMIT command. If following defaults will plotter a he action never feet) minutes) or is the by the batch using specified print [200] [30] not terminates [200) [1000] log by: 1log the LOG file, to and job ended with an unhandled switch, the following value SUBMIT/OUTPUT file /OUTPUT (LOG,NOLOG,ERROR) should switch always ERROR error. will be [LOG] to to print print If the used: be the the the user GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING I.Line The questions line printer Printer Defaults in this section are used and SYSTEM Parameters to set default values for Job banner pages printed at the beginning of each print request. user's name Number of the spooler. and job any /NOTE value banner pages is printed (0-5) on The them. [2] ~ Job trailer pages are printed at the end of each print request. The user's name and any spooler checkpoint information is printed on them. of Number job trailer [2] pages(0-5) print each File header pages are printed before each file or copy in printed in BOLD letters on each header 1s name file The request. page. of Number file header pages(0-5) [2] the request with print a for The user can specify a special form default following the specified, not is switch this If switch. /FORMS be will used: Name for standard output forms [NORMAL] (of 4-6 characters) with for a the current form name to determine if a forms change 1s required specific user request. Number of characters that uniquely identifies form(2-6) Tape The system administrator can label compared is The number of characters that uniquely identifies a form Label allow [4] Action users non-privileged to bypass processing. for non-privileged users? (YES,NO) Allow bypassing Miscellaneous Defaults The questions in following The section this disk-page-to-spocler section refer and Parameters to general establishes unit conversion [NO] factors. GALAXY parameters. default Do you want the standard limit computation(YES,NO) bias and [YES] The default acticn to be taken when output exceeds the specified limit for an output spcoler may be to ABORT the job and ignore all remaining output, ASK the cperator what to do, or proceed to finish processing the job. Default ABORT (rir) [End $ of output-limit-exceeded Galgen Dialog] action (ABORT,ASK,PROCEED) [ASK] GENERATING G.4 ASSEMBLING I’SRep 28: THE Give A TAILORED NEW GALAXY the BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM SUBMIT (BATCH JOB) GALGEN program, SYSTEM Command: /TIME:0:30:00/RESTARTABLE. In the last step you GALAXY parameter options for batch a and tailored spooling GALAXY.CTL, to and generates Type SUBMIT Type completed file, your the and GALAXY batch press the press message the giving batch the you must ESC file submit for the a [Job | (BATCH and press name, the the RETURN GALAXY GALAXY.CTL.1 Queued, GALAXY control file, reads GALAXY key. I.D., Request-ID of this tailored request the choice create key; the system prints ESC key; the system prints ¢ JOB) produced your To GALAXY.CTL and job. SSUBMIT which contains system. system. programs the job This spooling batch and /TIME:0:30:00/RESTARTABLE a and system present files and the GALCNF.MAC. GALAXY.CTL GALCNF.MAC system. (BATCH .CTL.1. JOB). Type The system prints the time limit of /TIME:0:30:00/RESTARTABLE(xtr) 170, Limit 0:30:00] $ NOTE If assembly is appropriate unsuccessful, .LOG file find the problem. it (which might control file), resubmit the you are the When the messages One the assembly CDRIVE ASSEMBLY SUCCESSFUL that new the next 1s batch step, problems a will when printed for can .LOG file, and file. 1If what your caused systems specialist. succeeds, you printed on every will your control see a series terminal: file of of the of GALAXY generated. system it is can now be run. However, before you advisable to check the .LOG files to arose %-type processing be the you .CTL following, SUCCESSFUL The later to ASSEMBLY message that system similar consult if can, correct editing the determine software LPTSPL system no GALAXY to failure, or the specified examine see If you involve delete unable programmer to during batch system generation. It (warning) error occurred. Such an error GALAXY.CTL to be unsuccessful, but could you attempt to use the important that you correct the current batch systenmn. any problems new batch now, system. before is proceed to be sure that conceivable might not cause create problems Therefore, you stop it is running GENERATING A G.5 SHUTTING DOWN THE Once you have checked occurred during the GALAXY programs and TAILORED BATCH AND OLD GALAXY SPOOLING SYSTEM SYSTEM the .LOG files to be sure that no errors build procedure, you are ready to stop all old start the new ones. NOTE During the following steps, Steps 29-56, it 1s important not to have timesharing users logged in to the system, as their jobs could 1initiate batch or spooling requests during the critical period of changeover. However, 1t 1s acceptable for requests to be present in the queues at the time of Step 29 as long as the 0ld GALAXY system 1s a Release 4.2 system. l"Step 29: Type POP and Press the RETURN Key. To return to the OPR program so you can stop the type POP and press the RETURN key. o01ld The system prints GALAXY objects the OPR> prompt. $POP (i) OPR> mp Step 30: Give the command: SHOW STATUS and Press the RETURN Key. To determine which GALAXY objects are command GALAXY and press the RETURN Key. in use, give the objects. OPR>SHOW STATUS OPR> 13:42:58 Printer Unit 0 -- System Device Status -Status: Status Idle Batch-Stream Strm Status Status 0 1 Idle Idle 2 Tdle SHOW STATUS The system responds with a list of GENERATING I’Enep 31: A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM Give SHUTDOWN Commands for Each Component of the GALAXY System. To be sure SHUTDOWN that each command for GALAXY each object GALAXY has been object in Crsc) OPR>SHUTDOWN | | FOR) PRINTER (CsO) you must give a (UNIT NUMBER) 0(wr) (STREAM NUMBER) ) OPR>SHUTDOWN (SCHEDULING Error: If you ERROR: STARTED--, W Step 32: down, 30. CrsD (SCHEDULING next your shut Step see a ¢ FOR) BATCH-STREAM message you may similar lgnore to:—--THERE thils message ARE and NO go SHUTDOWN command. The message means site was not using tbe specified device. Give the Command: To verify that all parts the SHOW STATUS command, 0:2(wi) DEVICES on to only the that SHOW STATUS and Press the RETURN Key. of the GALAXY and press the system RETURN have Key. STARTED -- been shutdown, give OPR>SHOW STATUS (rer) OPR> 13:44:55 -- THERE ARE NO DEVICES OPR> .Step 33: To Give the Command: return to components, enabled TOPS-20 type EXIT and Press the RETURN Key. command PUSH and level press the so vyou RETURN can key. The kill system the GALAXY prints the prompt. OPR>EXIT (1) $ I’vStep 34: To ki1ill the CTRL/E TYPE Give the Command: GALAXY SPEAK SYSJOB “ESPEAK and Press the RETURN Key. components and COMMANDS press - you the END WITH must RETURN give key. the "ESPEAK The system "2]. { S"ESPEAK(ri1) [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH ~ 7] command. prints, Type [PLEASE GENERATING l"Step 35: A TAILORED BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM Give the KILL command for each GALAXY component. You should KILL 11 the components referenced 1in should also KILL BATCON, which normally runs as a SYSJOB.RUN. You separate job under SYSJOB. [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB KILL QUASAR (1) KILL KILL ORIONGiD) ( &) MOUNTR l"Step 36: COMMANDS - END WITH "Z] Type CCJOB 1 and Press the RETURN Key. ccJoB B Step 37: 1D Type STATUS and Press the RETURN Key. STATUS (Re1) Bp Step 38: To Type "% and Press the RETURN Key. return the to TOPS-20 TOPS-20 enabled command level, type CTRL/Z. The system prints prompt. !Z $ mp Step 39: Give the Command: Press the RETURN “ECREATE (DIRECTORY) PS:<OLD-GALAXY> and Key. You should create a directory to store your old GALAXY system before copying vyour new one into SYS:. Type CTRL/E CREATE and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints (DIRECTORY). Type PS:<OLD-GALAXY> and press the RETURN key. The system prints [NEW] and the enabled subcommand prompt. | $"ECREATE { (DIRECTORY NAME) PS:<OLD-GALAXY>(rr) [NEW] $S ‘Step 40: To create Press the RETURN Key. a key. [NEW] Ss@ directory with default characteristics, press the RETURN mp Step 41: GENERATING A Give Command: the TAILORED PS:<OLD-GALAXY> To copy your just old created, (FROM). Type QUASAR type and and a AND COPY Press program COPY SYS:QUASAR.EXE prints (TO). system prints BATCH and (FROM) the into press press SYS:QUASAR.EXE PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE.1 (TO) => RETURN the the Type PS:<OLD-GALAXY> message verifying that $COPY (FROM) SPOOLING SYS :QUASAR.EXE the (TO) Key. back-up ESCAPE SYSTEM directory key. ESCAPE The that you system prints key. The system and press the RETURN key. it has copied the file. The PS:<OLD-GALAXY> PS:<OLD-GALAXY>QUASAR.EXE.l1 [OK] $ l’»Step 42: Copy the other files of Your necessary to GALAXY System into PS:<OLD-GALAXY>. Repeat Step 41 your present the following as many GALAXY times files, system if as into they copy PS:<OLD-GALAXY>. all You the must files copy of all of exist. QUASAR.EXE BATCON.EXE CDRIVE.EXE GLXLIB.EXE SPRINT.EXE LPTSPL.EXE OPR.EXE ORION.EXE MOUNTR. EXE PLEASE.EXE OMANGR. EXE SPROUT.EXE G.6 STARTING Now you new tallored are UP THE ready to system. NEW GALAXY replace the SYSTEM old GALAXY system on SYS: with your GENERATING ) Step 43: A TAILORED Give the Command: BATCH COPY PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE and AND (FROM) Press SPOOLING SYSTEM PS:<BUILD>QUASAR.EXE the RETURN (TO) Key. To copy the QUASAR.EXE component of the new GALAXY system 1nto the system, type COPY and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints (FROM). Type PS:<BUILD>QUASAR.EXE and press the ESCAPE key. The system prints (TO) . Type PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE and press the RETURN key. The system prints a message verifying each file it has copled correctly. SCOPY (FROM) PS:<BUILD>QUASAR.EXE PS:<GALAXY>QUASAR.EXE.1 I’Efiep 44: M)Step 45: To 1in Step | into the “ESPEAK and Press the RETURN Key. SPEAK SYSJOB must give and press the RETURN COMMANDS - END WITH "Z] SPEAK (ki) [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END WITH I”Step 46: system 42. start the new GALAXY system you S GALAXY times as it is necessary to copy all the files system into PS:<SUBSYS>. You must copy all the Give the Command: Type CTRL/E [PLEASE TYPE the [OK] area. Repeat Step 43 as many of vyour new GALAXY listed PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXECEI—) PS:<SUBSYS>QUASAR.EXE.1 Copy the other components of system files => (TO) the “ESPEAK key. The command. system prints, A Give the RUN command for each component in the new GALAXY system. To be sure that all components of the GALAXY must give the RUN command for each component system shown [PLEASE TYPE SYSJOB COMMANDS - END with RUN SYS:QUASAR(xI) RUN SYS:ORION(r1) RUN » Step 47 "2} SYS:BATCON(x1) Type JCB RUN SYS:QUASAR RUN SYS:ORICN RUN SYS:BATCON JOB 1 /(wi 1 / and Press the RETURN Key. are started, in Step 35. you GENERATING Bp Step 48: A TAILORED Give the command: JOB BATCH AND SPOOLING SYSTEM RUN SYS:BATCONCwn) 1 / SYS:BATCON (R RUN mp Step 49: Type / and Press the RETURN Key. / JOB 1 RUN SYS:BATCON / CRe) mp Step 50: Give the Command: STATUS and Type "% and Press the RETURN Key. RUN SYS:BATCON / STATUS $ l"Step 51: ~Z (Rer) Type POP and Press the RETURN Key. You must return to OPR command level to start the components new GALAXY system. At TOPS-20 command level, type POP and RETURN key. The system prints the OPR of your press the prompt. SPOP (ri1) OPR> mp Step 52: To Type TAKE SYSTEM: start all the components SYSTEM:SYSTEM.CMD OPR>TAKE and press SYSTEM.CMD and Press the RETURN Key. of the the RETURN new GALAXY system, type TAKE Key. SYSTEM:SYSTEM.CMD(®r) OPR> mp Step 53: Give the Command: To verify properly, RETURN each component of should now give a vyour GALAXY system 1s running SHOW STATUS command and press the key. .Step 54: To that vyou SHOW STATUS and Press the RETURN Key. move Type PUSH and Press the RETURN Key. to another level, type PUSH and press the OPR>PUSH(Rer) @ P Step 55: @ $ Type ENABLE and press the RETURN Key. ENABLE RETURN Key. GENERATING A TAILORED BATCH AND G.7 MAKING YOUR NEW GALAXY SYSTEM THE SPOOLING SYSTEM PERMANENT SYSTEM Once your all the new system is successfully running, you may want to delete files from PS:<BUILD>, PS:<GALAXY>, and PS:<OLD-GALAXY> to make disk more ‘Step 56: space available. Give the Command: and Press the DELETE PS:<BUILD>*.*, RETURN Key. PS:<OLD-GALAXY>* Crs) SDELETE ) Step 57: To and (FILES) PS:<GALAXY>*.*, PS:<{OLD-GALAXY>*. *(w1) Type POP and Press the RETURN Key. return to OPR press PS:<BUILD>*.*, the level RETURN to supervise your new GALAXY system, type POP Key. ket ) SPOP( OPR> M) Step 58: Type CTRL/X and Press the RETURN Key. If you wish to return to the system PTYCON job, the RETURN Key. OPR>"X (Rei) PTYCON> The system returns the type CTRL/X and PTYCON prompt. press INDEX Account validation, 3-15 Accounting shift changes, 3-21 test, ALGOL test, APL-20 8-6 8-6 Applications, GALAXY, G-10 Archiving parameters, 3-19 Archiving recycle period, Creating Tailoring for, host, Defining, E-1 B-9 Creating DECSYSTEM-2020 microprocessor, 5-1 Creating LPFORM.INI, 3-24 Creating PS:<REMARKS>, 3-24 Creating system defaults, Creating the TOPS-20 file 2-1 system, 3-19 ARPANET, DECSYSTEM-2020 CONFIG.CMD, E-1 ARPANET ARPANET information, Entering, E-2 Assembling GALAXY system, G-12 DBMS-20 test, DECSYSTEM-20, Loading 8-6 the monitor on, 2-7 DECSYSTEM-20 Creating, CONFIG.CMD, A-9 DECSYSTEM-20 distribution BASIC-PLUS-2 test, Batch defaults, GALAXY, G-10 8-5 systenm, G-1 Batch Bias controls, tape, 1-7 DECSYSTEM-20 front-end, Creating, 4-1 DECSYSTEM-20 installation preparations, 2-2 DECSYSTEM-20 installation 3-17 tape, 1-7 DECSYSTEM-20 latency Changing operator password, 3-23 Changing system name, 3-5 A-10, B-10 Changing user group, 3-23 Changing system parameters, Checking DECSYSTEM-20 software, 2-1 Checking DECSYSTEM-2020 software, COBOL-68 COBOL-74 8-6 8-7 CONFIG.CMD, Creating DECSYSTEM-20, A-9 Creating DECSYSTEM-2020, B-9 Configuring drives, F-3 CONTROLLER SELECT switches, 2~-4, DECSYSTEM-2020, Loading 2-13 Class scheduling, 3-17 CNVDSK program, A-16, B-14 test, test, optimizations, 3-16 DECSYSTEM-20 monitor, 1-9 Renaming, A-9 DECSYSTEM-20 pocket installation guide, C-1 DECSYSTEM-20 software, Checking, 2-1 Installing, A-1 Updating, A-1 the monitor on, 2-19 DECSYSTEM-2020 CONFIG.CMD, Creating, B-9 DECSYSTEM-2020 disk formatter, F-1 DECSYSTEM-2020 distribution tape, 1-8 DECSYSTEM-2020 installation preparations, 2-14 DECSYSTEM-2020 installation tape, 1-8 DECSYSTEM-2020 microprocessor, Creating, 5-1 2-17 Copying files, 4-3 Creating DECSYSTEM-20 CONFIG.CMD, A-9 Creating DECSYSTEM-20 front-end, 4-1 DECSYSTEM-2020 monitor, Renaming, B-8 Index-1 INDEX DECSYSTEM-2020 monitors, 1-9 DECSYSTEM-2020 pocket installation guide, D-1 DECSYSTEM-2020 software, Checking, 2-13 Installing, B-1 Updating, B-1 Defaults, systen, Creating GALAXY, 3-7 (CONT.) GALAXY applications, GALAXY batch G-10 GALAXY defaults, G-11 GALAXY files, Restoring, G-2 GALAXY line printer defaults, G-11 GALAXY line printer parameters, G-11 GALAXY parameters, G-9, G-11 G-11 GALAXY line printer, G-11 Defining ARPANET host, E-1 Defining line printer parameters, 3-12 Defining logical names, 3-10 Defining remote lines, 3-9 Defining tape logical unit numbers, 3-11 Defining time zone, 3-14 Disk pack formatting, Disk packs, Mounting, 2-3, 2-15 Distribution tape, DECSYSTEM-20, F-3 1-7 DECSYSTEM-2020, GALAXY permanent, Making, G-19 GALAXY system, GALAXY system, Assembling, Starting, GALAXY tape G-11 GALGEN, Running, GALGEN Directory parameters setting, 3-15 Disk formatter, DECSYSTEM-2020, F-1 1-9, G-1 G-12 G-16 label action, G-8 G-3 procedure, Halting the monitor, 4-1 Improvements, Performance, 1-8 Installation Installing, 7-1 Drives, Configuring, F-3 3-16 preparation, 1-2 Installation preparations, DECSYSTEM-20, 2-2 DECSYSTEM-2020, 2-14 DUMPER, Running, G-10 defaults, 2-33 Installation tape, DECSYSTEM-20, 1-7 DECSYSTEM-2020, 1-8 Entering Error Mounting, 2-5, 2-18 tools, 1-5 Installing DECSYSTEM-20 software, A-1 Installing DECSYSTEM-2020 software, B-1 Installing distribution tape, 7-1 Installing the file system, ARPANET information, Installation E-2 messages, KSFORM, FORTRAN F-4 test, 8-6 Front-end, Creating 2-23 DECSYSTEM-20, Installing 4-1 update tape, 7-1 Front-end monitor, Restarting, 4-2 KSFORM, F-1 KSFORM error GALAXY, KSFORM loading, Shutting down, G-13 GALAXY administrative control, G-9 KSFORM program-operator messages, interaction, Index-2 F-1 F-1 F-4 INDEX Parameters, Archiving, 3-19 Changing system, GALAXY, G-11 Line printer parameters, Defining, 3-12 GALAXY, G-11 B-10 Defining on 2-19 names, Defining, 3-10 Logical unit numbers, Defining tape, 3-11 Logical LPFORM.INI, Creating, Making Pocket 3-24 Making GALAXY permanent, the installation guide, DECSYSTEM-20, C-1 DECSYSTEM-2020, D-1 Primary monitor, A-20 the, Program, G-19 Making line printer, GALAXY, G-9, G-11 GALAXY line printer, G-11 Migration, 3-19 Parameters setting, Directory, 3-15 Performance improvements, 3-16 Permanent monitor, Making the, A-22, B-20 2-7 Loading the monitor DECSYSTEM-2020, A-10, 3-12 the monitor on DECSYSTEM-20, F-3 PAKINT, Latency optimizations, DECSYSTEM-20, 3-16 Line printer defaults, Loading (CONT.) CNVDSK, permanent monitor, A-22, B-20 Making the primary monitor, A-20 Microprocessor, A-16, Restoring, A-8, PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>, A-6, Restoring, Creating DEC5YSTEM-2020, 5-1 Migration parameters, 3-19 Migration recycle period, 3-19 B-7 B-7 PS:<OPERATOR>, 7-5 Restoring, PS : <REMARKS>, Creating, 3-24 PS:<SUBSYS>, Restoring, Monitor, B-14 PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>, 2-37, 7-6 PS:<SYSTEM>, DECSYSTEM-20, 1-9 Halting the, 4-1 Renaming DECSYSTEM-20, Restoring, 2-34 PS:<UETP.LIB>, Restoring, A-9 2-38, A-8, B-8 Renaming DECSYSTEM-2020, B-8 Restarting front-end, Starting the, 2-28 Monitor selecting, 3-1 Monitors, DECSYSTEM-2020, Mounting disk 2-15 Mounting 2-5, 1-9 packs, 4-2 2-3, installation tape, 2-18 Mounting TU45 tape drive, 2-6, 2-18 2-6, 2-18 Mounting TU77 tape drive, RAM file, 3-14 Release 4, Reverting to, A-17 Remote lines, Defining, 3-9 Renaming DECSYSTEM-20 monitor, A-9 Renaming DECSYSTEM-2020 monitor, B-8 Restarting front-end monitor, 4-2 Restarting the system, 6-1 Restoring GALAXY files, G-2 Restoring A-8, PS:<KNEW-SUBSYS>, B-7 Restoring PS:<KNEW-SYSTEM>, A-6, B-7 Operator password, Changing, 3-23 Index-3 (CONT.) INDEX Restoring 7-5 Restoring 7-6 Restoring Restoring 2-38, Restoring Reverting PS:<OPERATOR>, Tailoring PS:<SUBSYS>, Tailoring your system, Tape drive allocation, 2-37, PS:<SYSTEM>, 2-34 PS:<UETP.LIB>, A-8, to 4, ALGOL, DUMPER, 2-33 GALGEN, G-8 UETP, 8-1 8-6 APL-20, 8-6 BASIC-PLUS-~-2, COBOL-68, controls, 3-17 Setting terminal speeds, 3-7 Setting user groups, A-11 Shutting down GALAXY, G-13 DECSYSTEM-20, FORTRAN, 8-6 SORT-20, 8-7 2zone, Mounting, A-1 Updating 8-6 Defining, 3-14 TOPS-20.BWR file, TOPS-20.DOC file, TU45 tape drive, Software, Installing 8-7 DBMS-20, Time 8-5 8-6 COBOL-74, Scheduler 3-1 3-20 Test, A-17 Running Running Running E-1 Terminal speeds, Setting, 3-7 2-34 release ARPANET, Tape drive errors, 3-20 Tape logical unit numbers, Defining, 3-11 B-8 software, for 2-35 2-35 2-6, TU77 tape drive, Mounting, 2-6, DECSYSTEM-20, A-1 SORT-20 test, Spooling Starting 8-7 system, 1-9, G-1 GALAXY system, UETP, G-16 Running, Starting the monitor, Switch register, 2-7 2-28 Update Installing, 7-1 Updating DECSYSTEM-20 System, Assembling Batch, GALAXY, GALAXY, G-12 software, A-1 Updating DECSYSTEM-2020 software, B-1 G-1 G-1 Restarting the, 6-1 Spooling, G-1 Starting GALAXY, G-16 Tailoring your, 3-1 System User 3-23 groups, setting, A-11 3-7 3-5 Verification tests, 8-3 parameters, Changing, System group, Changing, name, Changing, System User defaults, Creating, System 8-1 tape, power A-10, up, B-10 2-2, 2-14 Working Index-4 set swapping, 3-16 TOPS-20 KS/KL Model A Installation Guide AA-P346A-TM READER’S COMMENTS NOTE: This form is for document comments only. DIGITAL will use comments submitted on this form at the company’s discretion. If you require a written reply and are eligible to receive one under Software Performance Report (SPR) service, submit your comments on an SPR form. Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please make sugges- tions for improvement. Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number. Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent. [1 Assembly language programmer [] Higher-level language programmer [ Occasional programmer (experienced) [J User with little programming experience [] Student programmer [J Other (please specify) Name Date Organization Telephone Street City State —____ Zip Code or Country il el I No Postage Necessary if Mailed in the United States BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 POSTAGE WILL BE PAID MAYNARD MASS. BY ADDRESSEE 200 FOREST STREET MRO1-2/L12 MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752 Cut Along Dotted Line SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS
Home
Privacy and Data
Site structure and layout ©2025 Majenko Technologies